You are on page 1of 358

Start

Commissioning Manual Edition 01/2008

Medium-Voltage AC-Converter
SINAMICS GM150

Start

Introduction

Safety Instructions

Medium-Voltage AC Converters

Commissioning (software)

SINAMICS GM150
Commissioning Manual for
SINAMICS GM150, Software
Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1

Commissioning (hardware)

Parameter assignment /
addressing

Functions

Alarm, error and system


messages

Appendix

Commissioning Manual

1/2008

A5E00923869K

Start

Start
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90327 NRNBERG
GERMANY

Ordernumber: A5E00923869K
05/2008

Copyright Siemens AG 2008.


Technical data subject to change

Start

Table of contents
1

Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1

Purpose of this document ..............................................................................................................9

1.2

Performing a receiving inspection..................................................................................................9

Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 11


2.1

Observing the five safety rules.....................................................................................................11

2.2

ESD-sensitive components..........................................................................................................11

2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6

Safety concept .............................................................................................................................13


Monitoring functions.....................................................................................................................13
Insulation monitoring....................................................................................................................13
Undervoltage tripping...................................................................................................................14
High-speed grounding switch.......................................................................................................15
Emergency shutdown (trip line) ...................................................................................................16
Controlled stop, EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (option L60) .....................................................16

Commissioning (software) ....................................................................................................................... 19


3.1

Commissioning tools....................................................................................................................19

3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2

Software installation.....................................................................................................................19
System requirements for installing STARTER.............................................................................19
Installing STARTER .....................................................................................................................20

3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5

Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface..........................................................20


Hardware components required for PROFIBUS communication ................................................20
PROFIBUS interface, diagnostics LEDs, address switches ........................................................20
Connecting the PROFIBUS cables ..............................................................................................23
Setting the PROFIBUS address switches....................................................................................24
Requirements for communication via PROFIBUS .......................................................................25

3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2

Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update ...................................................26


Data backup .................................................................................................................................26
Upgrading firmware version automatically...................................................................................27

3.5

Switching on the auxiliary power supply ......................................................................................27

3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
3.6.3.2
3.6.3.3
3.6.3.4
3.6.3.5
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2

The STARTER Commissioning Tool ...........................................................................................28


Working with the STARTER project wizard .................................................................................28
Options for creating a project.......................................................................................................31
First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard ..................................................................32
Assembling a new project online .................................................................................................32
Downloading the drive project to the PG .....................................................................................38
Configuring a drive.......................................................................................................................39
Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving ..................................................55
Entering additional important parameters....................................................................................57
First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard .............................................................60
Assembling a new project online without using the project wizard..............................................60
Configuring your drive project ......................................................................................................68

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Table of contents

3.6.4.3
3.6.4.4
3.6.5
3.6.5.1
3.6.5.2
3.6.5.3
3.6.5.4
3.6.6
3.6.7

Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving ................................................. 83
Entering additional important parameters (V2.5) ........................................................................ 87
First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard ............................................................... 91
Creating a new project ................................................................................................................ 91
Configure the drive unit ............................................................................................................... 97
Start drive project and download to target device..................................................................... 116
Entering additional important parameters ................................................................................. 121
Concluding parameter comparison ........................................................................................... 124
Saving a project ........................................................................................................................ 128

3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.1.3
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.5.1
3.7.5.2
3.7.5.3
3.7.6
3.7.6.1
3.7.6.2
3.7.6.3
3.7.6.4
3.7.6.5
3.7.6.6
3.7.6.7
3.7.6.8
3.7.6.9

Commissioning via the operator panel...................................................................................... 132


General information about the AOP30 operator panel ............................................................. 132
The AOP30 operator panel ....................................................................................................... 132
The keys of the AOP30 ............................................................................................................. 134
Basic operation of the AOP 30.................................................................................................. 135
First commissioning and basic parameter assignment with the AOP30 operator panel .......... 138
Initial commissioning with the AOP 30...................................................................................... 138
Basic parameterization with the AOP 30 .................................................................................. 139
Parameterization errors............................................................................................................. 143
Saving the parameters permanently ......................................................................................... 143
Individual configuration of the AOP30 operator panel .............................................................. 143
Define operation screen ............................................................................................................ 143
Control settings ......................................................................................................................... 148
Inhibit functions ......................................................................................................................... 151
Menu description and setting options ....................................................................................... 154
Introduction (AOP menus)......................................................................................................... 154
Operation screen....................................................................................................................... 154
Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 156
Fault/alarm memory .................................................................................................................. 159
Commissioning / service drive commissioning ......................................................................... 161
Commissioning / service device commissioning....................................................................... 163
Commissioning / Service - AOP settings .................................................................................. 166
Commissioning/Service - AOP diagnostics............................................................................... 171
Language .................................................................................................................................. 174

Commissioning (hardware) .................................................................................................................... 175


4.1

Overview of parameter macro interconnections in table format ............................................... 175

4.2

Conduct signal check ................................................................................................................ 175

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.4
4.3.2.5
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.3.2
4.3.3.3

Conducting hardware tests ....................................................................................................... 176


Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 176
Required hardware tests ........................................................................................................... 177
Circuit-breaker test.................................................................................................................... 177
Test of the make-proof grounding switch and the pre-charging ............................................... 178
Testing the door interlocking and the door limit switch ............................................................. 180
Test of the pre-charging and of the line switch ......................................................................... 180
Testing the EMERGENCY STOP button .................................................................................. 181
Recommended hardware tests ................................................................................................. 182
Test of the main fans................................................................................................................. 182
Test of the redundant main fan ................................................................................................. 183
Test of the auxiliary fans ........................................................................................................... 183

4.4
4.4.1

Checking the signal wiring ........................................................................................................ 184


Potential concept....................................................................................................................... 184

Parameter assignment / addressing ...................................................................................................... 185

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Table of contents

5.1

Parameters.................................................................................................................................185

5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3

BICO technology: Interconnecting signals.................................................................................188


Binectors and Connectors..........................................................................................................188
Interconnecting signals using BICO technology ........................................................................189
Additional explanations of BICO technology..............................................................................191

5.3

Data sets ....................................................................................................................................192

5.4

Changing over units ...................................................................................................................197

5.5

Reference parameters/normalizations.......................................................................................199

Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 201


6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.3.1
6.1.3.2

Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)............................................................201


Basic settings .............................................................................................................................201
Motor data identification.............................................................................................................204
Advanced settings......................................................................................................................205
Field weakening starting point ...................................................................................................205
Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator...........................................................................206

6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2

Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors .................................206


Safety information ......................................................................................................................206
Basic settings .............................................................................................................................207
Motor data identification.............................................................................................................210
Pole position identification .........................................................................................................211
Advanced settings......................................................................................................................213
Field weakening starting point ...................................................................................................213
Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator...........................................................................214

6.3

Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors ........................214

6.4
6.4.1
6.4.1.1
6.4.1.2
6.4.1.3
6.4.1.4
6.4.1.5
6.4.1.6
6.4.1.7
6.4.1.8
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.2.5
6.4.2.6
6.4.2.7
6.4.2.8
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.7.1
6.4.7.2
6.4.7.3

Drive Functions ..........................................................................................................................214


Setpoint channel ........................................................................................................................214
Description .................................................................................................................................214
Jog .............................................................................................................................................216
Fixed speed setpoints ................................................................................................................220
Motorized potentiometer ............................................................................................................221
Main/supplementary setpoint and setpoint modification............................................................222
Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover.............................................224
Suppression bandwidths and setpoint limits..............................................................................225
Ramp function generator ...........................................................................................................226
Speed controller .........................................................................................................................231
Description .................................................................................................................................231
Speed controller adaptation .......................................................................................................233
Speed controller pre-control and reference model ....................................................................235
Droop function............................................................................................................................238
Torque control ............................................................................................................................240
Torque limiting............................................................................................................................242
Current setpoint filter..................................................................................................................244
Current controller .......................................................................................................................245
Vdc control .................................................................................................................................246
Flying restart ..............................................................................................................................249
Automatic restart........................................................................................................................250
Bypass function..........................................................................................................................256
Staging function .........................................................................................................................261
Description of the staging function.............................................................................................261
Staging without a staging command..........................................................................................262
Staging with a staging command ...............................................................................................263

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Table of contents

6.4.7.4
6.4.8
6.4.8.1
6.4.8.2
6.4.8.3
6.4.8.4
6.4.9
6.4.10

Sequence of a motor change .................................................................................................... 265


Output-end disconnector or circuit breaker............................................................................... 267
Description ................................................................................................................................ 267
Switching conditions for the disconnector................................................................................. 269
Switching conditions for the output circuit breaker ................................................................... 272
Startup....................................................................................................................................... 273
Switching frequency reduction .................................................................................................. 277
Technology function: friction characteristic curve ..................................................................... 279

6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3

Monitoring and protective functions .......................................................................................... 281


Block protection......................................................................................................................... 281
Thermal motor protection .......................................................................................................... 282
Circuit breaker switching cycle.................................................................................................. 283

6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6

Hardware-related optional functions ......................................................................................... 285


Redundancy mode .................................................................................................................... 285
Control Unit redundancy mode ................................................................................................. 285
Power unit redundancy mode ................................................................................................... 290
Parallel circuit configuration ...................................................................................................... 290
Brake controller ......................................................................................................................... 291
Recooling unit ........................................................................................................................... 292
Fan control ................................................................................................................................ 295
Ancillary fan monitoring............................................................................................................. 297

6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
6.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
6.7.3
6.7.3.1
6.7.3.2

Function modules...................................................................................................................... 298


Function modules...................................................................................................................... 298
Technology controller................................................................................................................ 299
Description/Commissioning....................................................................................................... 299
Examples................................................................................................................................... 300
Integration of the technology controller..................................................................................... 302
Extended monitoring functions.................................................................................................. 303
Characteristics/Commissioning................................................................................................. 303
Integration ................................................................................................................................. 304

6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2

Extended diagnostic functions .................................................................................................. 305


Description ................................................................................................................................ 305
Integration ................................................................................................................................. 307

Alarm, error and system messages ....................................................................................................... 309


7.1

Further information on alarms, error and system messages .................................................... 309

7.2

External alarms and faults......................................................................................................... 309

7.3

Message from the grounding switch ......................................................................................... 309

7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4

Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 310
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 310
Diagnostics via LEDs ................................................................................................................ 310
Diagnostics via parameters....................................................................................................... 312
Indicating and rectifying faults................................................................................................... 316

Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 317
A.1

Troubleshooting/FAQs .............................................................................................................. 317

A.2

List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 317

A.3
A.3.1
A.3.2

Parameters for interconnecting signals..................................................................................... 318


BICO technology: Interconnecting signals ................................................................................ 318
Information about the parameter nomenclature:....................................................................... 319

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Table of contents

A.3.3
A.3.4
A.3.5
A.3.6
A.3.7
A.3.8
A.3.9
A.3.10
A.3.11
A.3.12
A.3.13
A.3.14
A.3.15

Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV................320


Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV................328
Overview of standard interconnections for the parameter macro PM001540 on B_INFMV......329
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001555 for option G66 .................331
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001557 Analog O PSA for
options K21 and K20..................................................................................................................332
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001558 Analog O PSA for
options K22 and K20..................................................................................................................334
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001571 for Emergency Button
1 option ......................................................................................................................................336
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001580 Lamps and StartStop
Button.........................................................................................................................................336
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001582 for option L27-L29
Bypass1 .....................................................................................................................................338
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001583 for option L53 UPS .........341
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001584 for option L55
Standstill Heating .......................................................................................................................342
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001585 for options N20, N21
Capacitor Tripping device Circuit Breaker .................................................................................342
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001587 for option Motor
temperature sensors ..................................................................................................................343

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 345


Index...................................................................................................................................................... 353

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Start

Introduction
1.1

Purpose of this document


This documentation facilitates the safe handling of the SINAMICS GM150 medium-voltage
converter and contains comprehensive information on the commissioning and operating
utilization phases and the tools available for it.
This Commissioning Manual is part of the electronic documentation.
This Commissioning Manual is valid for:
Software version SINAMICS V2.5
STARTER version 4.1
Table 1-1

Overview

Usage phase

Document/tool

Commissioning

Parameterization and Startup Tool STARTER


List Manual GM150

Documentation scope
In the interests of clarity, this documentation does not contain all the detailed information for
all product types and cannot take into account every possible aspect of installation,
operation, or maintenance.

Target group
This documentation is geared toward machine manufacturers, commissioning personnel and
service personnel who put the SINAMICS GM150 medium-voltage converter into operation
and operate it.

1.2

Performing a receiving inspection


The incoming goods inspection involves the following:
Visual inspection and mechanical testing of the control cabinet system
Check the version number
Testing the voltages

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Introduction
1.2 Performing a receiving inspection

Note
Perform each step of the receiving inspection in order to identify major faults or defects
immediately.

A: Visual inspection and mechanical testing of the control cabinet system


Pay particular attention to the doors, checking for damage that frequently occurs when
handled incorrectly during shipping. Also check that all screws on the side walls are in
place.
Check that the cable ducts are still covered.
Check the converter for protruding wires.

B: Testing the voltages


Check that the power supply voltage matches the rating specified on the rating plate. (For
example, are the requirements AC 3~ and 1~ auxiliary voltage met, if supplied
separately?)
Check the rating plates of the medium voltage transformer and the motor.

10

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Safety Instructions
2.1

Observing the five safety rules


For your personal safety and in order to prevent material damage it is essential that you
follow the safety instructions given below and all safety-related instructions in your product
documentation. In particular pay attention to the safety-related instructions on the product
itself and always read the section headed "Safety Instructions" in each document.
DANGER
Danger due to high voltages
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if
the equipment is handled incorrectly.
Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain
present even after the converter is switched off.
Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.
Follow the five rules at all times and during each stage of the work.
The five safety rules:
1. Disconnect the system.
2. Protect against reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live

2.2

ESD-sensitive components

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)


CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

11

Start

Safety Instructions
2.2 ESD-sensitive components

Never touch electronic modules unless absolutely necessary in the course of


maintenance and repair procedures.
If the modules have to be touched, the body of the person concerned must be
electrostatically discharged immediately beforehand and be grounded.
Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials
such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of synthetic
fibers.
Always place electrostatic endangered assemblies on conductive bases.
Always store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive packaging
(e.g. metallized plastic or metal containers).
CAUTION
Use conductive packaging material
Electronic modules must be stored, transported and dispatched in conductive
packaging.
Electronic modules which are not correctly stored, transported or dispatched can be
damaged.
Pack electronic modules in appropriate conductive packaging (e.g. foam rubber or
aluminum foil).
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatically sensitive devices are illustrated
once again in the following drawings:

e
f

f
c

(1)

Figure 2-1

a
(2)

f
c

a
(3)

ESD protective measures

(1)

Sitting

(2)

Standing

(3)

Standing/sitting

ESD protective measures

12

= conductive floor

= ESD table

= ESD footwear

= ESD coat

= ESD wrist strap

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
f

= cubicle ground connection

[ID 6006.02]

2.3

Safety concept

2.3.1

Monitoring functions
The medium-voltage converter features hardware and software functions that protect it
against faults and damage caused by impermissible operating statuses or hardware
malfunctions. The control elements are located in the converter cabinet and support internal
microprocess-controlled monitoring and remote device monitoring.

2.3.2

Insulation monitoring

Insulation monitoring
The SINAMICS GM150 converter is operated ground-free via an IT system. This means that
the converter can continue to operate if a ground fault occurs.
NOTICE
A second ground fault causes the converter to fail.
For safety reasons, it is necessary to detect such ground faults, in order to eliminate the risk
of electric shock on the converter. For this reason, the SINAMICS GM150 converter is
equipped with an A-ISOMETER insulation monitor (type IRDH275BM), which continuously
monitors the condition of the converter, including the motor.
Only one insulation monitoring device can be connected to each live connected IT system.
The insulation monitor automatically adjusts monitoring in line with the line discharge
capacitance.
Before carrying out any insulation or voltage testing on the power system, the voltage
monitor's instrument cables must be disconnected for the duration of testing.
The A-ISOMETER Type IRDH275BM is connected between the ungrounded supply and the
equipotential bonding conductor (PE).

Self-test
The A-ISOMETER IRDH275B automatically runs a self-test routine whenever the insulation
resistance of the mains supply > 20 M or every 24 hours if an output relay has been
preselected for system fault signaling.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

13

Start

Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept

Terminal monitoring
The connections to mains and ground (PE) are monitored continuously. If the cables are
interrupted or not connected, or if their resistance is high, this is indicated on the LCD.
In this case, please check the terminal conductors immediately, as the insulation resistance
is not being measured properly.
The insulation resistance can be > 20 M in new or small IT systems. An alarm would also
be output in this case. In this case, terminal monitoring must be deactivated in Setup2.
The insulation monitor monitors the insulation resistance of the converter with respect to two
limit values:
Limit value 1: Insulating resistor < 500 kOhms = Signal 1 (alarm)
Limit value 2: Insulating resistor < 100 kOhms = Signal 2 (fault)
The messages are wired as follows on the terminal strip TM 15, and output as messages to
the AOP30 and the starter.
Signal

Terminal

Message 1

.HC-A11-X522:3

Message 2

.HC-A11-X522:4

For more detailed information on how the A-ISOMETER IRDH275B functions and
instructions on how it is operated, see "Supplementary instructions (options, third-party
suppliers)".

2.3.3

Undervoltage tripping

Tripping of the circuit breaker in case of undervoltage


If a serious fault occurs (e.g., overload in the DC link), the converter is immediately
disconnected from the power supply by means of the safety shutdown function.
WARNING
This function cannot ensure that the drive stops immediately, nor can it ensure that residual
voltages do not still exist at the output terminals and within the unit.
The shutdown of the circuit breaker is triggered by a safety contactor combination.
It is essential for the circuit breaker on the system side to be equipped with an undervoltage
trip to ensure the wire-break protection for the circuit breaker OFF command.
If a circuit breaker OFF command is issued as a result of an overvoltage trip, the circuit
breaker is switch off so that it is fail-safe.

14

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept

2.3.4

High-speed grounding switch

Description
The short-circuiter is triggered if an over-voltage occurs due to a serious fault and it cannot
be brought under control by opening the circuit-breaker and unlocking the pulse block of the
machine.
When the short-circuiter thyristors are triggered, the circuit-breaker is always deactivated.
Once the thyristors have been triggered, an acknowledgement signal is output to the closedloop control system. Fiber-optic conductors are used to control gating of the thyristors and
the acknowledgement signals.
The short-circuiter is triggered by the Power Stack Adapter.
WARNING
It takes up to six minutes for the voltages to reach a safe level once the high voltage and
auxiliary voltage have been switched off.
If the short-circuiter is defective, this can significantly increase the discharge time.
Always observe the five safety rules in "Safety information/personnel protection" and in the
converter documentation.
The response voltage depends on the rated output voltage of the converter:
Rated output voltage [kV]

2.3

3.3

4.16

6.0

6.6

7.2

Response voltage [kVdc]

2.2

3.125

4,.4

5.7

6.25

6.8

(for each half of DC link)

The resistors absorb the energy stored in the DC link and limit the current. In the event of
false tripping, the torque surge for the machine, which is still rotating, is limited by the
resistors.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

15

Start

Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept

2.3.5

Emergency shutdown (trip line)

Description

'5,9(&OL4

'5,9(&OL4

)LEHURSWLFFDEOH

36$

Figure 2-2

&RQWDFWRUFRQWURO
IRU
FLUFXLWEUHDNHUV

2Q2II

&8

36$

2II

Networked structures for safe shutdown in an emergency

The overview diagram shows how central components are networked. The DRIVE-CLiQ
connection between the control unit and the power stack adapter is considered secure
because communication on the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is monitored cyclically.
With regard to contactor control for the circuit breaker, a two-channel bypass to the open
circuits is provided for safety reasons. Refer to the overview diagram for circuit breaker
control in the appendix. This ensures that the circuit breaker opens whenever a fault occurs
within the system, that is, system faults in the control unit or power stack adapter cause the
circuit breaker to trip. A bypass to the circuit breaker is also provided via a fiber-optic ring if
faults occur in other inverter systems.
The following time-coded signals are transmitted via the fiber-optic ring:
Pulse inhibit
Circuit breaker OPEN
Crowbar CLOSED
Arc-through of all IGCTs (only with GM150 IGCT)

2.3.6

Controlled stop, EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (option L60)

Description of the EMERGENCY STOP function


The EMERGENCY STOP function for controlled shutdown stops the drive by means of a
quick stop process along a deceleration ramp that must be parameterized.
NOTICE
The drive is stopped during controlled deceleration without braking modules with only a
very low % braking torque. Depending on the load machine, the ramp-down procedure may
take a long time.

16

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept

Testing the EMERGENCY STOP button


Most of the contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button are integrated in the controller circuit
of the circuit breaker. The two remaining opener contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button
are situated on the terminal block.
EMERGENCY
STOP button

Where connected
=.LA-X11:9-10

=.LA-S31:11-12
=.LA-S31:21-22
=.LA-S31:31-32

Circuit breaker
control circuit

=.LA-X11:5-6
=.LA-X11:7-8

=.LA-S31:51-52

EMERGENCY STOP =.LA-X51:1, 2


customer

=.LA-S31:61-62

Excitation equipment

If jumpered STOP; if not


jumpered EMERGENCY STOP
(produces an instantaneous stop
command on the circuit breaker)

=.LA-X51:3, 4

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm (AWG 10)


You will find further information in the section "Circuit book" in your operating instructions.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

17

Start

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.1

Commissioning tools
You have two options for commissioning the converter:
1. STARTER commissioning tool
We recommend you use the STARTER commissioning tool and Project Wizard for
easy commissioning.
In this case, you must install the STARTER software, which you can find on the
supplied CD. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled Software
installation (Page 19).
You must also set up a PROFIBUS interface in order to perform the commissioning
with STARTER. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled
" Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface (Page 20) ".
2. The AOP operator panel
If you have no PC or programming device (PG), you can perform the commissioning
using the AOP operator panel. In this case, continue with the section entitled
" Commissioning via the operator panel (Page 132) ".

3.2

Software installation

3.2.1

System requirements for installing STARTER

Prerequisites for installing the STARTER


For successful installation and operation of the STARTER software, the following
prerequisites are needed:
Hardware requirements:
Programming device (PG) or PC with
Windows 2000: Pentium II 400 MHz, 256 MB RAM, or
Windows XP Professional: Pentium III 500 MHz, 512 MB RAM
1024 x 768 pixel screen resolution

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

19

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Software requirements:
Windows 2000 SP3 or SP4, or
Windows XP Professional SP1 or SP2 or
Windows Server 2003 SP1
Internet Explorer V6.0.

3.2.2

Installing STARTER

Installing the STARTER via the SETUP file


Install STARTER via the "setup" file on the CD supplied.
Double-click the "Setup" file.
The installation wizard guides you through the individual installation steps.
[ID 5105.00]

3.3

Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface

3.3.1

Hardware components required for PROFIBUS communication


To perform the commissioning with STARTER, you must set up a PROFIBUS interface.

Required hardware components:


Prefabricated PROFIBUS or MPI cable
Field PG
CP5512 adapter (if using a laptop) or
CP5611 interface card (if using a PC)

3.3.2

PROFIBUS interface, diagnostics LEDs, address switches

Introduction
The PROFIBUS connection, diagnostics LEDs, and the PROFIBUS address switch are
located on the Control Unit CU320.

20

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface

5'<
'3
237
02'

5'<
'3,
237
02'

Figure 3-1

View of the Control Unit with PROFIBUS interface

X126 PROFIBUS connection


PROFIBUS diagnostics LEDs
PROFIBUS address switches

X126 PROFIBUS interface





Figure 3-2

X126 PROFIBUS connection

Table 3-1

PROFIBUS interface X126

Pin

Signal name

Description

Range

Not assigned

M24_SERV

Power supply for teleservice, ground

0V

RxD/TxDP

Receive/transmit data P (B)

RS485

CNTRP

Control signal

TTL

DGND

PROFIBUS data reference potential

VP

Supply voltage plus

5 V +- 10%

P24_SERV

Power supply for teleservice, + (24 V)

24 V (20.4 V 28.8 V)

RxD/TxDN

Receive/transmit data N (A)

RS485

Not assigned

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

21

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface

CAUTION
No CAN cables may be connected to the X126 interface. If CAN cables are connected, the
CU320 and other CAN bus nodes could be seriously damaged.
Note
A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface (X126) for remote
diagnostics purposes.
The power supply for the teleservice terminals 2 and 7 may have a max. load of 150 mA.

Diagnostics LED
The meaning is explained in the table below.
Table 3-2

Description of the DP1 LEDs

Color

Status

-----

Off

Description
Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Note:
PROFIdrive is ready for communication when the Control Unit is ready to operate (DP1
LED is on).

Green

Continuously lit

PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is taking place.

Green

0.5 Hz flashing
light

Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place.


The controller is not transferring any setpoints.
During synchronous operation, no global control (GC) or a faulty global control (GC) is
transferred by the Controller.

Red

Continuously lit

Cyclic communication has been interrupted.

PROFIBUS selector
The PROFIBUS address switch is located under the cover.

Figure 3-3

22

PROFIBUS address switch cover

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface

3.3.3

Connecting the PROFIBUS cables

Description
The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with/without a programming
device/PC connector.

352),%86FRQQHFWRUV
ZLWKRXW3*3&FRQQHFWLRQ
(6%$;$

Figure 3-4

352),%86FRQQHFWRUV
ZLWKSURJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&
FRQQHFWLRQ
(6%%;$

PROFIBUS connectors

Connect the cables to the PROFIBUS connectors, as these connectors contain the
necessary bus terminating resistors.
Connect the cable shield over a wide area on both sides.

Switching the bus terminating resistor on and off


The terminating resistors must be switched on at both ends of the bus line.
The bus terminating resistors must be switched off at all other connectors.
)LUVWEXVQRGH

/DVWEXVQRGH

RQ
RII

Figure 3-5

RQ
RII

RQ
RII
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

)URPSUHYLRXV
EXVQRGH

7RQH[W
EXVQRGH

Position of the bus terminating resistors

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

23

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Switch the bus terminating resistor on or off depending on its position in the bus,
otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly.

3.3.4

Setting the PROFIBUS address switches

Description
The PROFIBUS address of the Control Unit CU320 must be set for PROFIBUS
communication.
You have two options for setting the PROFIBUS address:
DIP switch on the Control Unit CU320
Parameter p0918 (default setting)

Setting via DIP switch


A value is assigned to DIP switches S1 to S7.
Table 3-3

PROFIBUS address switches

Switch

Significance

S1

20 = 1

S2

21 = 2

S3

22 = 4

S4

23 = 8

S5

24 = 16

S6

25 = 32

S7

26 = 64

Move switches S1 to S7 to the required position to set the PROFIBUS address.


If the PROFIBUS address is set with DIP switches S1 to S7, then parameter p0918
(PROFIBUS address) is read-only and displays the set address for the Control Unit. If the
address is changed, the new setting does not become effective until the Control Unit CU320
is switched on.

Example: Using DIP switches to set a PROFIBUS address


In this example, PROFIBUS address 37 is set.

24

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface

      



6

6
21

      


21
2))
6



6

2))






Example:

Significance

Note
The PROFIBUS address switches have a default setting of 0 or 127 (set via parameter
p0918).

Setting via parameter p0918


You can only do this if the address has been set to 0 or 127 using the address switches, that
is, all switches from S1 to S7 are set to ON or OFF (default setting). If the address is
changed, the new setting does not become effective until the Control Unit CU320 is switched
on.
Note
The set PROFIBUS address is saved by means of the "Copy RAM to ROM" function.

3.3.5

Requirements for communication via PROFIBUS

Description
The PROFIBUS master must always send a 1 in the eleventh bit (bit 10) of the first control
word (control by PLC). The process data (PZD) will not otherwise be processed further
internally.
It is not sufficient to interconnect parameter p854 permanently with a 1.
This also applies to slave-to-slave communication between multiple slaves (converter with
DC master as an excitation device...). The eleventh bit (bit 10) must be preset to 1 in the first
control word from the master to the converter. This also applies when no other master
control commands are in use and slaves are communicating by direct slave-to-slave data
exchange only.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

25

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.4 Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update

3.4

Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update

3.4.1

Data backup

Data backup
CAUTION
The CompactFlash card must only be inserted or removed when the power is off.
Otherwise there is a risk of data loss or damage to the card,
which would prevent commissioning of the drive.
Only remove or insert the CompactFlash card when the power is switched off.

Check that a CompactFlash card has been inserted into the CPU.
Remove the CompactFlash card from the CPU and back up the data stored on the
card.

Figure 3-6

26

CPU with a CompactFlash card

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.5 Switching on the auxiliary power supply

3.4.2

Upgrading firmware version automatically

Introduction
When new converter firmware is installed, e.g. by installing a new CompactFlash card, the
firmware for the components is upgraded automatically after switching on.

Description
Automatic firmware upgrade is indicated by the <RDY> LED on the CU flashing
orange/green, and by an LED on the component concerned also flashing.
If the <RDY> LED on the CU flashes rapidly in orange, this indicates that the update is
complete.
CAUTION
During the firmware upgrade, the firmware of the individual components is updated.
Interruptions of the firmware upgrade may cause damage to the components.
Therefore, never interrupt the firmware upgrade process.

Switch the converter off and on again.

3.5

Switching on the auxiliary power supply

Description
Switch on the 230 V and 24 V auxiliary power supply. When doing so, refer to the
circuit diagram in the "Circuit diagram" section in the Operating Instructions.
Note
System power-up
It can take several minutes for the system to power up.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

27

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

3.6

The STARTER Commissioning Tool

3.6.1

Working with the STARTER project wizard

STARTER - Work areas


The STARTER user interface is divided into four work areas:

Figure 3-7

STARTER - Work areas

Work area

Explanation

: Toolbar

In this area, you can access frequently used functions by clicking icons.

: Project navigator

The elements and projects available in the project are displayed here.

: Work area

Project-specific settings for drive configuration are made here.

: Detailed view

Detailed information about faults and alarms, for example, is displayed this area.

Calling up the STARTER program


You have two options for calling up the STARTER program:
1. Click on the "STARTER" icon on the desktop
2. Select the Start > Simatic > STEP7 > STARTER menu command in the Windows start
menu.
After the first program start, the dialog screen of the STARTER project wizard appears.

28

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-8

STARTER start dialog

Disabling the project wizard


You can disable the project wizard.

Figure 3-9

Disabling the project wizard

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

29

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click the "Display wizard during start" check box to remove the check mark. The
project wizard then no longer appears the next time the STARTER program is called
up.

Calling up the project wizard


If the project wizard is disabled, you can call it up manually to create a project with the
project wizard.
Select the "New with wizard" command in the "Project" menu.

Online Help
STARTER features a detailed online Help function. The online Help is automatically
displayed when you start up STARTER.

Figure 3-10

STARTER - Help

You can disable the online Help at any time.


In the "Options" menu, select command "Settings"

30

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
On the "Workbench" tab, click the "Display first steps at the start" check box to remove
the check mark. Now, the STARTER Help wizard will no longer appear the next time
the program is called up.
You can reactivate the online help at any time by selecting menu command "First steps" in
the "Help" menu.

Checking and configuring STARTER dialog screens


STARTER has a series of dialog screens for entering the data required for configuring your
device.
Note
The STARTER dialog screens are preassigned with defined values.
Carefully check the preset values in the dialog screens and adapt them to your requirements
as needed.
By carefully and diligently entering the configuration data, you can avoid any deviations
between the project data and the device data that are displayed in online mode.

3.6.2

Options for creating a project

Options for creating a project


You can create projects both in ONLINE and OFFLINE mode.

ONLINE MODE
In ONLINE mode, there is a communications link to the drive that enables data exchange.
All parameters are directly read from the drive.
Parameter changes are written to the drive and become immediately effective there.
Parameter sets can be generated by upread.
Parameter sets can be written by download.
Process data can be read and written to (setpoints, actual values, control commands,
etc.).
For further information, refer to the STARTER Help.
In ONLINE mode, you can perform the first commissioning with or without the project wizard.
First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard.
The drive device, the options, and the infeed are automatically detected by STARTER
and entered into the corresponding dialog screens.
First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard (Page 60).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

31

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
You must enter the drive device, the options, and the infeed into the corresponding
dialog screens.

OFFLINE Mode
In OFFLINE mode there is no communication link to the drive. Data cannot be exchanged.
All parameters are read from the parameter sets of the project rather than from the drive.
Each drive and each drive component (DO (Control Unit, Motor Module, Terminal
Module) of the SINAMICS drive system have a parameter set.
Parameter changes are written to the parameter set.
Parameter sets cannot be uploaded directly from the device.
Parameter sets cannot be downloaded directly to the device.
Process data cannot be editing (by defining a setpoint and control commands or
acquiring an actual value).
You perform "First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard" in OFFLINE mode.

3.6.3

First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard

3.6.3.1

Assembling a new project online

User interface of the STARTER project wizard

Figure 3-11

STARTER - Project wizard

Click on button "Find drive units online..."

32

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Create new project

Figure 3-12

STARTER - Create new project

Type a name into the "Project name" input field.


Type the author's name in the "Author" input field.
Type a comment about the project in the "Comments" input field.
Click on button "Continue >" to set up a PROFIBUS interface in the PG/PC.

Setting up the PG/PC interface

Figure 3-13

STARTER - Selecting the programming device/PC interface

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

33

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS,

Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.

Figure 3-14

STARTER - Setting the programming device/PC interface

Buttons "Properties...", "Diagnostics...", "Copy..." and "Select..." are now available.


Note
To parameterize the interface, you must install the appropriate interface card (e.g.: CP5512.

Click on button "Properties..." to change the properties of the PROFIBUS interface.

34

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-15

STARTER - Programming device/PC interface properties

Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.

Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
Click on button "Change and test..." and, in the next window, on button "Diagnostics" to
check the interface.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

35

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-16

STARTER - PROFIBUS diagnostics

The "Test" and "Read" buttons are now available.


Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.

Insert drive project


Click on button "Continue >". The new drive project is inserted.

36

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-17

STARTER - Insert drive units

Click on button "Continue >".


An overview of the selected project data is displayed.

Figure 3-18

STARTER - Summary

Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

37

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Saving the project


Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

3.6.3.2

Downloading the drive project to the PG


You have created a project and saved it to your hard disk.
Next, transfer the configuration data of your project to the PG.

Connect the STARTER to the target system


There are two methods by which you can connect the STARTER to the target system:
1. Select the "Connect to target system" command in the "Project" menu.
2. Click on the "Connect to target system" menu icon in order to connect to the target
system. A comparison is carried out between the drive and the previously created project.
The differences are displayed.

Figure 3-19

STARTER - Online/offline comparison

Click on button "Load to PG ==>". The following message appears:

38

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-20

STARTER - Data loaded

Click on button "OK". There must be no more differences on the display.


Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

3.6.3.3

Configuring a drive

Selecting the device configuration


Select your project.
Select the "Drive navigator" in the Project navigator .

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

39

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-21

STARTER - Selecting a drive navigator

Click on button "Device configuration".


The following window appears:

Figure 3-22

40

STARTER - Device configuration

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click on button "Carry out drive configuration".

Selecting the function module

Figure 3-23

STARTER - Selecting a control structure

Select the right function module for your application.


If you require bypass mode for your application, you must activate check box
"Technology controller". Activate the function module "Technology controller" only if
your converter features this function.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

41

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".

Determine the standard and connection voltage

Figure 3-24

42

STARTER - Drive settings

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".

For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

43

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Selecting a motor type

Figure 3-25

STARTER - Selecting a motor type

Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".

44

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Entering motor data

Figure 3-26

STARTER - Entering motor data

Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.

If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

45

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.

NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.

46

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Calculating the motor/controller data


Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.

Figure 3-27

STARTER - Calculating the motor/controller data

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

47

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.

Click on button "Continue >".

Selecting an encoder type


Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.

48

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-28

STARTER - Selecting an encoder type

You can set three encoders.


Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
Radio button "Enter data".
Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

49

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Default settings for setpoints and command sources

Figure 3-29

STARTER - Default settings for setpoints and command sources

Select the pre-assignment macros for the command sources.


From the drop down lists "CDS 0" (command data set 0) and "CDS 1" (command data
set 1), select the corresponding default settings for your device configuration.
The following pre-assignment macros for the command sources can be selected:
PROFIBUS
Terminal block
Select the pre-assignment macros for the setpoint sources.
From the selection fields "CDS 0" (command data set 0) and "CDS 1" (command data
set 1), select the corresponding default settings for your device configuration.
The following pre-assignment macros for the setpoint sources can be selected:
PROFIBUS
Terminal block
Motorized potentiometer
Fixed setpoint

50

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.

Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

51

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

PROFIBUS process data exchange

Figure 3-30

STARTER - Process data exchange

If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".

52

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Entering values for key parameters

Figure 3-31

STARTER - Key parameters

In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.

Click "Continue >".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

53

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Summary of the drive unit data

Figure 3-32

STARTER - Summary

A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.

Saving the project


Click on button "Finish".
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

54

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

3.6.3.4

Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving

Downloading the project data to the target system


There are two methods by which you can set up a connection to the target system:
1. Select the "Connect to target system" command in the "Project" menu.
2. Click on the "Connect to target system" icon to connect to the target system.
In menu "Project", select the command "Load to target system" or in
menu "Target system" the command "Load" followed by command "Load
to target system".
Click on button "<== Download" or
Click on the "Load project to target system" icon to transfer the data of
your project to the target system.
Note
If there is more than one drive listed in the project navigator, then clicking on "Download to
target system" loads the data to all devices.
Clicking "Download" only loads the data for the device that is selected.

Figure 3-33

STARTER - Download

To download the data to the target device, click on button "Yes".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

55

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-34

STARTER - Saving the project

Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.

Figure 3-35

STARTER - Copy RAM to ROM

NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.

Results of the preceding steps


1. You have now created a drive unit project online using STARTER.
2. You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC.
3. You have transferred the project data to the drive unit.
4. You have saved your project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is backed up in the
event of a power failure.
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
If you come up against any system conditions that are beyond your control while in online
mode, we recommend that you delete the drive project from the project navigator and
carefully create a new project with STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for
your application.

56

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

3.6.3.5

Entering additional important parameters


Below is a brief overview of the key parameters for initial commissioning and identification:

Parameters for STW1 control signals


The signals for control word 1 (STW 1) in the drive object are interconnected as follows, in
accordance with the configuration of command data set 0 (CDS0) on terminal strip ( P700[0]
= terminal strip):
The parameters comprising STW 1 are listed below.

Check the input signals that comprise control word 1.


Interconnect the hardware signals to the Sinamics modules during commissioning.

Setting parameters for circuit breakers


The medium-voltage switch function is assigned to the infeed object.
Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.

Example of how the circuit breaker works


The switch is turned on by a switch-on pulse and off by a switch-off pulse (p6677[0] and
p6678[0]).
The switch-on pulse lasts 1 second (p6681[0]).
The switch-off pulse lasts until the check-back signal "Off" is received (P6680[0]).
Circuit breaker parameters:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

57

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

The control signal display is shown in parameter r6660:

Connect both of the check-back signals "Auxiliary voltage1/2 OK" during


commissioning.

Configuring the CDS/DDS


In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".

58

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-36

Select CDS

Click on button "Configure CDS..."

Figure 3-37

Configuring Command Data Sets

In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

59

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

3.6.4

First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard

3.6.4.1

Assembling a new project online without using the project wizard

Create new project

Figure 3-38

STARTER project wizard - create new project

Create the project by selecting command "New" in the "Project" menu.

Figure 3-39

STARTER - New project

Type a name into the "Project name" input field.


Enter the destination where you want to save the project in the "Storage location" input
field.
Click on button "OK".

60

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Establishing a connection online (connecting to the target system)


There are two methods by which you can set up the connection:
1. Select the "Connect to target system" command in the "Project" menu.
2. Click on the "Connect to target system" icon to connect to the target system.

Insert drive project


Once you have established a connection to the target system you will see the following
message:

Figure 3-40

STARTER - Going online

Click on button "Yes" to confirm and automatically select a drive unit for the project.

Figure 3-41

STARTER - Select drive unit

Select the check box for the drive you wish to select.
Click on button "Accept" to add the selected drive to the project.
The following message is displayed

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

61

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-42

Message: Transfer drive units to the project?

Click on button"OK" to transfer all parameters

Figure 3-43

STARTER - Accepting the drive project

Note
Topology not recognized
If the topology is not fully recognized various values will be missing, for example:
"Infeed"
"All TM modules"
Drive "VECTORMV"
This is confirmed by viewing the topology:

Click the Setpoint button in the topology view to configure the values.

62

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-44

STARTER - Topology view

Saving the project


You have to save the project for the whole topology to be recognized.
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
NOTICE
The system will go offline without transmitting any data and will then go back online again.
A comparison is carried out between the drive and the previously created project. The
differences are displayed.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

63

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-45

STARTER - Online/offline comparison

Load drive unit to programming device


Click on button "Load to PG ==>".
The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-46

Message: Data is being loaded

Click on button "Yes".


The objects are recognized and a message is displayed confirming that the data have been
successfully transferred to the programming device.

64

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-47

Message: Data has been loaded

Acknowledge the message by clicking on button "OK".

Viewing and updating the topology after it has been recognized

Figure 3-48

STARTER - Selecting topology view

Double-click "Topology" in the directory tree to view the topology that has
been recognized.
Click on button "Update topology" to display the current data values.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

65

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-49

Topology view

Click on button "OK". There must be no more differences on the display.


Save your project by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

Displaying the status

Figure 3-50

STARTER - Diagnostic overview

Click on button "Diagnostic overview" to view the status of the drive unit components.
Click on button "Load to PG output" to load these settings.

66

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Load to PG output

Figure 3-51

STARTER - Loading the settings

Figure 3-52

STARTER - Topology output

Topology output

Target system output

Figure 3-53

STARTER - Output to the target system

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

67

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Messages

Figure 3-54

STARTER - Messages

Click on button "Messages" to display current faults and alarms.

3.6.4.2

Configuring your drive project

Conditions for carrying out basic drive unit configuration with the drive navigator
Before starting basic drive configuration with the drive navigator you have to:
Go offline
Load the data to the programming device when going offline
Save the STARTER project
Save the data from RAM to ROM when going offline

Configure drive unit


In the project navigator, open the project that contains your drive unit.

68

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-55

STARTER - Open project

In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
Double-click on "Drive navigator".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

69

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-56

STARTER - Drive navigator

Click on button "Device configuration".

Configuring the drive

Figure 3-57

STARTER - Carry out drive configuration

Click on button "Carry out drive configuration".

70

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Selecting the function module

Figure 3-58

STARTER - Selecting a control structure

Select the right function module for your application.


If you require bypass mode for your application, you must activate check box
"Technology controller". Activate the function module "Technology controller" only if
your converter features this function.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

71

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".

Figure 3-59

72

STARTER - Drive settings

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".

For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

73

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Selecting a motor type

Figure 3-60

STARTER - Selecting a motor type

Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".

74

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Entering motor data

Figure 3-61

STARTER - Entering motor data

Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.

If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

75

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.

76

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Calculating the motor/controller data


Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.

Figure 3-62

STARTER - Calculating the motor/controller data

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

77

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.

Click on button "Continue >".

Selecting an encoder type


Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.

78

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-63

STARTER - Selecting an encoder type

You can set three encoders.


Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
Radio button "Enter data".
Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

79

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Process data exchange

Figure 3-64

STARTER - Process data exchange

If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".

80

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Entering values for key parameters

Figure 3-65

STARTER - Key parameters

In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.

Click Continue >.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

81

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Summary of the drive unit data

Figure 3-66

STARTER - Summary

A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.

Saving the project


Click on button "Finish".
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

82

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

3.6.4.3

Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving

Downloading the project data to the target system


There are two methods by which you can set up a connection to the target system:
1. Select the "Connect to target system" command in the "Project" menu.
2. Click on the "Connect to target system" icon to connect to the target system.

Figure 3-67

STARTER - Online/offline comparison

Click on button "<== Download"


The following window is displayed

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

83

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-68

Starter - Download

To download the data to the target device, click on button "Yes".


After the project has been loaded, you will be prompted to save it.

Figure 3-69

Starter - Download to target system

Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.

Figure 3-70

STARTER - Loading data

A confirmation prompt is displayed, confirming that the data have been successfully
transferred to the target device.

Click on button "Close" to finish the procedure.

The Online/offline comparison window is displayed again.

84

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-71

STARTER - Online/offline comparison

NOTICE
The Online/offline comparison window may be displayed again (for example, if the status
reports that quick commissioning of the infeed was not completed).
Close the window.

Select command "Copy RAM to ROM" in the "Target system" menu to save
the drive data to the CompactFlash card or
Click on icon "Copy RAM to ROM" to save the data to the CompactFlash
card.

Exiting "Quick commissioning" mode

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

85

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select your project in the project navigator of the Starter user interface. With
the right mouse button, click on "Infeed_1" and select the expert list in the
shortcut menu.
Conclude quick commissioning by setting parameter P3900=3.

Figure 3-72

STARTER - Select the expert list

Figure 3-73

STARTER - Expert list

Note
Updating the parameter settings
Key parameters are updated when quick commissioning is finished.

Figure 3-74

STARTER- Parameter overview

To conclude the configuration of the new STARTER project with the new settings:

86

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
1. Disconnect STARTER from the target system.
2. Save the data from RAM to ROM.
3. Load the data to the programming device and save the project.
4. Reboot the system.

Results of the preceding steps


1. You have now created a drive unit project online using STARTER without using the
project wizard.
2. You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC.
3. You have transferred the project data to the drive unit.
4. You have saved your project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is backed up in the
event of a power failure.
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
If you come up against any system conditions that are beyond your control while in online
mode, we recommend that you delete the drive project from the project navigator and
carefully create a new project with STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for
your application.

3.6.4.4

Entering additional important parameters (V2.5)


Below is a brief overview of the key parameters for initial commissioning:

Parameters for STW1 control signals


The signals for control word 1 (STW 1) in the drive object are interconnected as follows, in
accordance with the configuration of command data set 0 (CDS0) on terminal strip ( P700[0]
= terminal strip):
The parameters comprising STW 1 are listed below.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

87

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Check the input signals that comprise control word 1.


Interconnect the hardware signals to the Sinamics modules during commissioning.

Setting parameters for circuit breakers


The medium-voltage switch function is assigned to the infeed object.
Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.

Example of how the circuit breaker works


The switch is turned on by a switch-on pulse and off by a switch-off pulse (p6677[0] and
p6678[0]).
The switch-on pulse lasts 1 second (p6681[0]).
The switch-off pulse lasts until the check-back signal "Off" is received (P6680[0]).
Circuit breaker parameters:

88

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

The control signal display is shown in parameter r6660:

Connect both of the check-back signals "Auxiliary voltage1/2 OK" during


commissioning.

Configuring the CDS/DDS


In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

89

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-75

Select CDS

Click on button "Configure CDS..."

Figure 3-76

Configuring Command Data Sets

In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".

90

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

3.6.5

First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard

3.6.5.1

Creating a new project

User interface of the STARTER project wizard

Figure 3-77

STARTER - Project wizard

Click on button "Arrange drive units offline..."

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

91

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Create new project

Figure 3-78

STARTER - Project wizard - Create new project

Type a name into the "Project name" input field.


Type the author's name in the "Author" input field.
Type a comment about the project in the "Comments" input field.
Click on button "Continue >" to set up a PROFIBUS interface in the PG/PC.

Setting up the PG/PC interface

Figure 3-79

92

STARTER - Setting the programming device/PC interface

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS.

Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.

Figure 3-80

STARTER - Setting the programming device/PC interface

Buttons "Properties...", "Diagnostics...", "Copy..." and "Select..." are now available.


Note
To parameterize the interface, you must install the appropriate interface card (e.g.: CP5512.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

93

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-81

STARTER - Programming device/PC interface properties

Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.
Note
Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses can be assigned for the drive objects
even if no PROFIBUS interface has been installed on the PC.
To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once, only the bus addresses
available in the project are proposed.

Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.

94

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-82

STARTER - Setting the programming device/PC interface

Click on button "Continue >" to insert a drive unit in the project wizard.

Select drive unit

Figure 3-83

STARTER - Select drive unit

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

95

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Choose the following data from the selection fields:
Device: Sinamics
Type: GM150
Bus address: Converter bus address
The bus address has to match the address set on the CU320 using the address
switch. Further information can be found in the "Commissioning (software)" section
of the "PROFIBUS connection" chapter.
Enter a name for the drive unit in the "Name" input field.
Click on button "Insert".

Figure 3-84

STARTER - Insert drive unit

The selected drive unit is displayed in the preview window of the project wizard.
Click on button "Continue >".
An overview of the selected project data is displayed.

96

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-85

STARTER - Summary

Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.

3.6.5.2

Configure the drive unit

Configure drive unit


In the project navigator, open the project that contains your drive unit.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

97

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-86

STARTER - Configure drive unit

In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
Double-click on "Configure drive unit".

98

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-87

STARTER - Configure drive unit

Select the correct voltage from the "Motor voltage" drop down list.
Select the correct cooling method from the "Cooling method" drop down list.
Note
With this step, you preselect the cabinet devices that are displayed in the "Drive units
selection" box.
You do not yet define the supply voltage at this point.

In the list under Drive unit selection, select the drive unit based on the ordering no.
(The ordering no. can be found on the rating plate of your converter).
Select the required "Default macro".
This default macro can be used for specific wiring configurations. Further information is
given in the "Parameters for signal interconnection" section of the Appendix.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

99

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click on button "Continue >".

Select options

Figure 3-88

STARTER - Selecting options

In the "Options selection" box, select the options that belong to your drive unit. To do
this, click on the check box of the relevant options, as per the rating plate.
The motor reactor value must be entered in p0353.
Note
In the starter, only those options that are software-relevant are listed.

100

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

NOTICE
If you plan to use a sinus filter (option Y15) it is imperative that you select the check box
for this option.
Compare your options carefully to the options specified on the rating plate.
The project wizard establishes internal interconnections based on the selected
options. It is not possible therefore to change the selected options later via the "
< Back " button.
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the
project navigator and add a new one.

Check the options you have selected carefully and then click on button "Continue >".

Set the device connection voltage and rated supply frequency

Figure 3-89

STARTER - Configuring the infeed

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

101

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Enter the supply voltage in the "Device connection voltage" input field.
When you enter the device supply voltage, always enter the total input terminal voltage.
For instance, a 24-pulse 7.2 kV converter corresponds to a supply voltage of 4 x 1,850
V = 7,400 V. If this is not taken into consideration when entering the device supply
voltage, the default control parameters will be incorrect.
Select the frequency from the "Rated supply frequency" drop down list.
Click on button "Continue >".

Selecting the function module

Figure 3-90

STARTER - Selecting a control structure

Select the right function module for your application.


If you require bypass mode for your application, you must activate check box
"Technology controller". Activate the function module "Technology controller" only if
your converter features this function.

102

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".

Determine the standard and connection voltage

Figure 3-91

STARTER - Configuration - Drive settings

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

103

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".

For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.

Click Continue >.

104

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Selecting a motor type

Figure 3-92

STARTER - Selecting a motor type

Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

105

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Entering motor data

Figure 3-93

STARTER - Entering motor data

Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.

If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".

106

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.

NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

107

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Calculating the motor/controller data


Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.

Figure 3-94

108

STARTER - Calculating the motor/controller data

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.

Click on button "Continue >".

Selecting an encoder type


Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

109

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-95

STARTER - Selecting an encoder type

You can set three encoders.


Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
Radio button "Enter data".
Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
Click on button "Continue >".

110

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Default settings for setpoints and command sources

Figure 3-96

STARTER - Default settings for setpoints and command sources

Select the pre-assignment macros for the command sources.


From the drop down lists "CDS 0" (command data set 0) and "CDS 1" (command data
set 1), select the corresponding default settings for your device configuration.
The following pre-assignment macros for the command sources can be selected:
PROFIBUS
Terminal block
Select the pre-assignment macros for the setpoint sources.
From the selection fields "CDS 0" (command data set 0) and "CDS 1" (command data
set 1), select the corresponding default settings for your device configuration.
The following pre-assignment macros for the setpoint sources can be selected:
PROFIBUS
Terminal block
motorized potentiometer
Fixed setpoint

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

111

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.

Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".

PROFIBUS process data exchange

Figure 3-97

112

STARTER - PROFIBUS telegram type

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".

Entering values for key parameters

Figure 3-98

STARTER - Key parameters

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

113

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.

Click "Continue >".

114

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Summary of the drive unit data

Figure 3-99

STARTER - Summary

A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.

Saving the project


Click on button "Finish".
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
The project is displayed as illustrated in the project navigator.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

115

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-100 STARTER - New project in the project navigator

The project topology is as follows:

Figure 3-101 Topology of the new project

3.6.5.3

Start drive project and download to target device


You have created a project and saved it to your hard disk.

116

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Next, transfer the configuration data of your project to the drive unit.
To transfer the STARTER project that was created offline to the drive unit:
1. Establish a connection to the target system
2. Download the project to the target system
3. Save the project in the target system

Connect the STARTER to the target system


There are two methods by which you can set up a connection to the target system:
1. Select the "Connect to target system" command in the "Project" menu.
2. Click on the "Connect to target system" icon to connect to the target system.

Figure 3-102 STARTER - Online/offline comparison

Downloading the project data to the target system and saving

In menu "Project", select the command "Load to target system" or in menu


"Target system" the command "Load" followed by command "Load to
target system".

Click on button "<== Download" or

Click on the "Load project to target system" icon to transfer the data of
your project to the target system.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

117

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Note
If there is more than one drive listed in the project navigator, then clicking on "Download to
target system" loads the data to all devices.
Clicking "Download" only loads the data for the device that is selected.

Figure 3-103 STARTER - Download

To download the data to the target system, click on Yes.

Figure 3-104 STARTER - Saving project data in the target system

Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.

Figure 3-105 STARTER - Copy RAM to ROM

118

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.
After the data have been loaded to the target device, various calculations are performed on
the CU.
These calculations mean that the online and offline parameters are no longer identical.

Figure 3-106 STARTER - Online/offline comparison

Click on button "Load to PG".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

119

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-107 STARTER - Load data to PG

Click on button "Yes".


After the project data has been loaded, the following window appears:

Figure 3-108 STARTER - Data has been loaded

The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-109 STARTER - Finish online/offline comparison

120

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Click on button "Close" to finish loading the project data.

Results of the preceding steps


1. You have created a drive unit project offline using STARTER.
2. You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC.
3. You have transferred the project data to the drive unit.
4. You have saved your project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is backed up in the
event of a power failure.
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
[ID 5121.00]

3.6.5.4

Entering additional important parameters


Below is a brief overview of the key parameters for initial commissioning:

Parameters for STW1 control signals


The signals for control word 1 (STW 1) in the drive object are interconnected as follows, in
accordance with the configuration of command data set 0 (CDS0) on terminal strip ( P700[0]
= terminal strip):
The parameters comprising STW 1 are listed below.

Check the input signals that comprise control word 1.


Interconnect the hardware signals to the Sinamics modules during commissioning.

Setting parameters for circuit breakers


The medium-voltage switch function is assigned to the infeed object.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

121

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.

Example of how the circuit breaker works


The switch is turned on by a switch-on pulse and off by a switch-off pulse (p6677[0] and
p6678[0]).
The switch-on pulse lasts 1 second (p6681[0]).
The switch-off pulse lasts until the check-back signal "Off" is received (P6680[0]).
Circuit breaker parameters:

The control signal display is shown in parameter r6660:

122

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Connect both of the check-back signals "Auxiliary voltage1/2 OK" during


commissioning.

Configuring the CDS/DDS


In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".

Figure 3-110 Select CDS

Click on button "Configure CDS..."

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

123

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-111 Configuring Command Data Sets

In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.

3.6.6

Concluding parameter comparison


Comparison of the online, offline, and default parameters can only be performed with an
online connection to the converter.
Find the list of parameters containing the parameters you want to compare.

Vector
Click on the adjacent icon.
The "Compare" window opens.

124

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-112 STARTER - Comparison

You can choose whether to compare the online data with the project that is currently
loaded or with the default parameters in the "Objects to compare" drop-down list.

Figure 3-113 STARTER - Comparison

Click on button "Display filters" to select the columns you want to include in the
comparison.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

125

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-114 STARTER - Display filters

Click on button "New comparison" to launch the online comparison.

Figure 3-115 STARTER - Launch the online comparison

126

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
A list of results listing the differences found is displayed.

Figure 3-116 STARTER - Results list

Evaluate the results displayed.


In the example described here, only the parameters that are different at this precise moment
are displayed.
Note
The parameters determined to be different vary constantly because they are always
changing.
You can either save the results as a log file or copy them to the clipboard to edit them in
another application.
Select radio button "Save as user-defined list of parameters" to save the script file.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

127

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-117 STARTER - Save the parameters

You can print out the comparion results. To do this, click on button "Print comparison
results".

Figure 3-118 STARTER - Print comparison results

3.6.7

Saving a project

Backup options
There are two ways of backing up projects to prevent data loss.
To be able to use the best method of restoring your data in any given situation, it is advisable
to back up your data using both methods.

Archiving a project
This backup method saves your project as a zip file, making it easy to use it with another
drive, for example.
Go offline.
Select the "Archive..." command in the "Project" menu.

128

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-119 Archive...

Select the project that you want to archive (project test27 in the example shown).

Figure 3-120 Archiving a project

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

129

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the folder where you want to archive the project (starter_projects in the example
shown).

Figure 3-121 Select the archive destination

The project is then saved as an archive and can be uncompressed and restored as and
when needed.

Saving and exporting a project


This data backup method saves your project as an XML file and allows it to be converted
back into a project using the import function.
The project data is structured and saved in XML format, either in the project folder or in the
selected target directory. It is only possible to export or import projects in OFFLINE mode.
The filing structure of the XML files largely corresponds to the structure of the project in the
project navigator.
Go offline.
Select the "Save and export" command in the "Project" menu.

130

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool

Figure 3-122 Saving and exporting a project

Select the target directory (for example D:\Starter_XML_Export)


If you do not enter a target directory, the data is exported to the project's current
location by default.

Figure 3-123 Exporting a project

Note
All data in the target directory selected will be deleted before the XML export. Make sure that
no subdirectories or files in the target directory are open on other applications (e.g.
displaying the directory in Windows Explorer). If they are, close the application and restart
the XML export.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

131

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Click "OK" to confirm the target directory.


The files in the target directory are deleted and the export of the project data begins.
Once the export has finished, the successfully completed export and the target
directory it has been exported to are displayed in the XML export/import status tab.

Figure 3-124 Status display

Click on the link highlighted in blue to obtain more detailed information about the project that
has been exported. This requires a program capable of displaying XML files (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer).

3.7

Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.1

General information about the AOP30 operator panel

3.7.1.1

The AOP30 operator panel

Description
You can use the advanced operator panel (AOP30) for commissioning, operating, and
diagnosing the converter.
The AOP30 communicates with the SINAMICS drive via a serial RS232 interface with PPI
protocol. The interface is a point-to-point connection. During communication, the AOP30 is
the master and the connected drive is the slave.

132

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Features of the AOP30


'LVSOD\

2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV
/('V
21 JUHHQ
$ODUP \HOORZ
)DXOW UHG

IXQFWLRQNH\V
0HQXNH\

0DVWHUFRQWURO
VHOHFWLRQ

.H\ERDUGLQWHUORFN

'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
FKDQJHRYHU
,QFUHDVHGHFUHDVH

1XPHULFNH\SDG

212))

-RJJLQJ

Figure 3-125 Structure of the operator panel (AOP30)

The AOP30 has the following features and functions:


Graphical LCD with:
Green backlighting for plain-text display
A resolution of 240 x 64 pixels
Quasi-analog "bar display" of process variables
Keypad for controlling drives during operation
Numeric keypad for the numeric input of parameter values
4 LEDs for indicating the operating status of the drive unit:
RUN: green
ALARM: yellow
FAULT: red
LOCAL/REMOTE: green
Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms
Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus
Realtime clock for the time stamping of faults and for setting up simple time controls
LOCAL/REMOTE switchover for selecting the operating location
Two-stage security concept to protect against unintentional or unauthorized changes to
settings.
Time and date memory powered by internal battery backup

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

133

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.1.2

The keys of the AOP30

Functions of the control keys

Calls up the main menu of the AOP30


0(18

Calls up the "inhibit functions" menu. More detailed information is


available in Chapter "Inhibit Functions".

Numeric keys for direct entry of values.

/2&$/
5(027(



Switches between remote and local mode. In local mode, the LED
illuminates.
More detailed information is available in Chapter Control Settings.

On/off button.
The "On" key is always in effect in local mode, if no inhibit function is
activated.
The "Off" key is only active in local mode and acts as "OFF1" in the
default setting. More detailed information is available in Chapter Control
Settings.
Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover. The key is only in effect in
local mode.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter Control Settings.

JOG Mode (Jogging)


-2*

The key is only in effect in local mode in "Ready to switch on" status
(not
when "operating").
The speed that is set in parameter p1058 is approached.

134

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Setpoint "increase" and setpoint "decrease".


With these keys, the setpoint can be specified with a resolution of 1% of
the maximum speed (the resolution corresponds to e.g. 15 RPM for
p1082 = 1500 RPM) Alternatively, the setpoint can also be entered
using the number keys. Note the labeling of the function keys that is
shown.
Using the number keys, any speed ranging between the maximum and
minimum speed can be entered.
More detailed information is available in Chapter Control Settings.
)

)



Function keys.
These keys have different functions depending on the menu. The
respective function appears in plain text above the key.

See also
Control settings (Page 148)

3.7.1.3

Basic operation of the AOP 30

The menu structure


Operation of the AOP 30 is menu-driven.
The following graphic shows the menu structure to make it easier to find a menu.
The menu displays marked with * only appear if you set the "special access" access level.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Inhibit Functions".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

135

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

$NWXHOOH6WUXQJHQ
+DXSWPHQ

$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
$OWH6WUXQJHQ
+LOIH

$OWH:DUQXQJHQ

6HO3DU
*UXQGLQEHWULHEQDKPH
%HWULHEVPDVNH
QGHUQ

.RPSOHWWLQEHWULHEQDKPH
0RWRULGHQWLILNDWLRQ

'LDJ

/IWHUODXI]HLW]XUFNVHW]HQ

%HUHLW

(LQ]HOQHV'2

$OOH'2

*HUWHNRQILJXUDWLRQ

)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S

$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ

'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ

3DUDPHWHUUHVHW

3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
3HUPDQHQWH
3DUDPHWHUEHUQDKPH

6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ

6WUVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU

(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ

$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XUFNVHW]HQ
$QWULHEV
LQEHWULHEQDKPH

,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH

*HUWH
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
$23
(LQVWHOOXQJHQ

6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
%DWWHULH]XVWDQG
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ

7DVWDWXUWHVW
$23
'LDJQRVH

/('7HVW
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ

3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNOVFKHQ 

6SUDFKH

Figure 3-126 Menu structure of the AOP 30

136

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

The function keys


The values are navigated through, input, and changed in the menus by means of function
keys (2). The respective assigned function is written in plain text (1) above the corresponding
function key.

581

%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
$/$50

%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S

)$8/7

0DVNH7\S
0DVNH:HUWH

F1

+LOIH

%DONHQ

QGHUQ

F4

F3

F2

]XUFN

F5




Figure 3-127 Function keys of the AOP 30

Changing a parameter
Observe the functions assigned to the function keys (1), which can differ from menu to menu
(e.g., function key F5 is assigned to the function OK or Change)
Using the function keys , , , select the parameter that you want to change.
In order to change the selected parameter you must activate the parameter according
to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
Use either the numeric keypad or the function keys
, , , to modify the selected parameter.
You must confirm the change according to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
Click the Back, function key to scroll back in the main menu, or
click the Menu function key to switch directly to the main menu.

Calling up parameter Help


Using the function keys or , select the desired parameter.
Press the Help function key.
Using the function keys or , select the desired Help topic.
Confirm the selected Help topic by pressing the OK key.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

137

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Press the Back function key to exit the Help function.

3.7.2

First commissioning and basic parameter assignment with the AOP30 operator
panel

3.7.2.1

Initial commissioning with the AOP 30

Introduction
During the initial commissioning of the converter, the first operating step is to set the
language. Then carry out the basic parameterization. The input of parameters is done in
seven or eight menus (depending on whether you want to enter equivalent circuit diagram
parameters).
Only when all of the parameters necessary for the initial commissioning have been set, no
more initial commissioning will be performed. Regardless of whether the parameterization
was carried out at the AOP or using the STARTER.
You can skip the menu-driven initial commissioning using the Menu key. The main menu
appears. By selecting the menu item Commissioning/Service - Drive Commissioning Complete Commissioning you can start the initial commissioning. When Complete
commissioning is selected, the parameterization of the infeed is omitted. The parameters
listed in section Basic Parameterization must be reparameterized during the Complete
Commissioning in the parameter list of the B_Infeed.

Selecting the language


After the first time the converter is switched on, the menu for selecting the language
appears.

Using the function keys or , select the desired language.


By default, the following languages are stored on the CompactFlash card
German
English
Spanish
Italian
French
Chinese
Confirm the selected language with the OK function key. A download process begins,
which can last several minutes.

138

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.2.2

Basic parameterization with the AOP 30

Introduction
The parameters that can be entered during the basic parameterization are listed in the
following. Depending on the configuration of the drive, not all of the parameters have to have
assigned values.

Initial commissioning Infeed


Table 3-4
Parameter

Drive Object B_Infeed


Parameter text

p6677

Switch, switch-on command signal type, switch 0

p6678

Switch, switch-off command signal type, switch 0

p6679

Switch On command pulse type, switch 0

p6680

Switch Off command pulse type, switch 0

p6681

Switch On/Off commands pulse type, switch 0

p6682

Switch disabling time, switch 0

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Motor standard/Motor type
menu is called up.

Motor standard/Motor type


Table 3-5

Drive Object VectorMV

Parameter

Parameter text

p100

IEC/NEMA mot stds


Setting IEC:
Display of the output in KW
Power factor p0308
Rated frequency 50 Hz
NEMA setting:
Display of the output in hp
Degree of efficiency p0309
Rated frequency 60 Hz

p300[0]

Mot type selection

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Motor parameter menu is
called up.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

139

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

motor parameter
For safe operation, some important parameters must be entered.
Table 3-6

Drive Object VectorMV

Parameter

Parameter text

p304[0]

Rated motor voltage

p305[0]

Rated motor current

p307[0]

Rated motor power

p308[0]

Rated motor power factor

p309[0]

Rated motor efficiency

p311[0]

Rated motor speed

p335[0]

Type of motor cooling

p388[0]

Exciter-Rated voltage

p389[0]

Motor - no-load excitation current

p390[0]

Motor - rated excitation current

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Equivalent circuit diagram
parameter menu is called up.

Equivalent circuit diagram parameter


Choose Yes or No.
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
Using the key, select line next (last entry).
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
If you selected Yes, the equivalent circuit diagram data menu is called up.
If you selected No, the encoder commissioning menu is called up.

Equivalent circuit diagram data


Table 3-7
Parameter

140

Drive Object VectorMV; Asynchronous machine


Parameter text

p320[0]

Motor rated magnetization current/short-circuit current

p322[0]

Maximum motor speed

p341[0]

Motor moment of inertia

p342[0]

Moment of inertia ratio of total to motor

p350[0]

Motor stator resistance, cold

p352[0]

Cable resistance

p354[0]

Cold motor rotor resistance/damper resistance d-axis

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter

Parameter text

p356[0]

Motor stator leakage inductance

p358[0]

Motor rotor inductance/damper inductance, d axis

p360[0]

Motor main inductance/main inductance d-axis saturated

Table 3-8

Drive Object VectorMV; Synchronous machine

Parameter

Parameter text

p350[0]

Motor stator resistance, cold

p354[0]

Cold motor rotor resistance/damper resistance d-axis

p356[0]

Motor stator leakage inductance

p358[0]

Motor rotor inductance/damper inductance, d axis

p359[0]

Motor damper inductance q-axis

p360[0]

Motor main inductance/main inductance d-axis saturated

p361[0]

Motor main inductance q-axis saturated

p362[0]

Saturation characteristic flux 1

p363[0]

Saturation characteristic flux 2

p364[0]

Saturation characteristic flux 3

p365[0]

Saturation characteristic flux 4

p366[0]

Saturation characteristic I_mag 1

p367[0]

Saturation characteristic I_mag 2

p368[0]

Saturation characteristic I_mag 3

p369[0]

Saturation characteristic I_mag 4

p1625[0]

Excitation current value calibration

p346[0]

Motor excitation build-up time

Note
If you select the line Back in this menu, the Motor standard/Motor type menu is called up.

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Encoder commissioning
menu is called up.

Encoder commissioning
Table 3-9

Drive Object VectorMV

Parameter

Parameter text

p400[0]

Enc type selection

p404[0]

Encoder configuration effective

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

141

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter

Parameter text

p405[0]

Square-wave signal encoder A/B track

p408[0]

Rotary encoder pulse No.

p491

Motor encoder fault response: ENCODER

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Basic commissioning menu
is called up.

Basic Commissioning
Table 3-10

Drive Object VectorMV

Parameter

Parameter text

p700[0]

Macro binector input (BI)

p1000[0]

Macro connector inputs (CI) for speed setpoints

p1070[0]

CI: Main setpoint

p1080[0]

Minimum speed

p1082[0]

Maximum speed

p1120[0]

Ramp-function generator ramp-up time

p1121[0]

Ramp-function generator ramp-down time

p1135[0]

OFF3 ramp-down time

Using the key, select line next (last entry).


Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key. The Message overview menu is
called up.

Message overview
In this menu, faults and alarms of the individual drive objects are displayed.
Acknowledging faults:
Using the function keys or , select the desired entry.
Press the Tools key and select Acknowledge. (If you do not want to acknowledge the
fault, select Back).
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
Opens the operation screen menu:
If no faults are present, press the Tools key and select Back.
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
The Operation screen menu is called up.

142

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Note
Depending on the configuration of your drive, additional settings are still necessary.

3.7.3

Parameterization errors

Description
If an error occurs when reading or writing parameters, this is indicated by a message in the
display of the AOP.

3.7.4

Saving the parameters permanently

Description
When parameters are changed, the new values are first saved in volatile memory (RAM). If
the changed values cannot be permanent saved, they are lost when the converter is
switched off. If changed values are not yet saved to the CompactFlash card, an "S" flashes
in the top right of the display

Saving the changed parameters


When confirming a parameter setting, press the OK key for more than 1 second. The
system displays a prompt asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the
EEPROM.
Select Yes if you want to save the changed values. All of the changes that are not yet
permanently saved are saved in EEPROM. The save is confirmed by a note, the
flashing "S" extinguishes or,
Select No if you do not want to save the changed values. The "S" continues to flash.

3.7.5

Individual configuration of the AOP30 operator panel

3.7.5.1

Define operation screen

Description
Depending on the type of drive, an operation screen with 10 different display parameters is
the default.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

143

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

9(&725 $86
9B'&

9
$867


3:,5. 
N:
7B/7
 r&
,4,67

$HII

+LOIH

,B,67
)B$86
/7,7
,',67
8B$86

QGHUQ


 $HII
 +]
 
 $HII
 9HII







'LDJ

6HO3DU

Figure 3-128 Example of operation screen

You can define the display of the operation screen to suit yourself in 5 types of display
(screen 2). The following types of display are available:
Values
Bar
mixed
Values type display:
2 digital values
10 values
The order of the entries in this screen determines the order of the operating variables
(parameters) displayed in the operation screen.
Bar type display:
3 bars
Mixed type display:
8 values/1 bars
4 values/2 bars
Order of the display: First come the parameters that are to be displayed digitally, then the
parameters that are to be displayed as bars.

Defining the operation screen


Press the Change function key. The display changes to the Define operation screen
menu.

%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH
DNWLY
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S

0DVNH7\S

+LOIH

:HUWH%DONHQ

]XUFN

QGHUQ

Figure 3-129 Define operation screen menu

144

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the active setting.
Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the desired type of display.
Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 Values and then, using the
Change function key, activate the setting.

%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH
DNWLY
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
0DVNH7\S
0DVNH:HUWH
+LOIH

:HUWH%DONHQ

]XUFN

QGHUQ

Figure 3-130 Define operation screen - Screen2 values

The display changes to the menu for entering the parameters.


%HWULHEVPDVNH
  U  

3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU

  U   

, B ,67

  U   

$8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO

   U   

)B $86 $ QWU IB $XVJ JOD

, B LVW

%HWUDJ

]XUFN

JO

QGHUQ

Figure 3-131 Define operation screen - select parameter

Using the or function keys, select the first parameter and then activate the setting
using the Change function key. The display changes to the menu for selecting the
DriveObject.
%HWULHEVPDVNH
  U
 
3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU
%,&2'2
 $XVZDKO
 &8
 U 
*0 
 %
 UB,1)12
 
9(&72509
   U   

+LOIH

, B ,67

, B LVW

%HWUDJ

JO

$8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO
)B $86 $ QWU IB $XVJ JOD

$EEUXFK

2.

Figure 3-132 Define operation screen - DriveObject selection

Using the function keys or , select the desired DO and confirm the setting by
pressing the OK key. The menu Selection parameters appears.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

145

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

%HWULHEVPDVNH

&8B*0$XVZDKO3DUDPHWHU
$ OOH3DUDPHWHU
U  3%3='HPSI:RU W

+LOIH

]XUFN

2.

Figure 3-133 Define operation screen - Parameter selection

You have two parameter selection options:


all of the parameters of the selected DO, or a
selection of plausible parameters (see "List of the signals for the operation screen"
below) of the selected DO.
Using the function key , select all parameters and confirm the selection with the
OK key. A list of all of the parameters of the selected DO is displayed or,
Select a line (a parameter) from the List of the signals for the operation screen of
the selected DO.
The parameters that are selected from this selection are displayed with an
abbreviated name (e.g. NSETP) in the operation screen.
Select the desired parameter or enter it using the number keys.
Confirm the setting by pressing the OK function key. The message Please wait
appears briefly. Then the operation screen appears in the configuration set by you.
9(&725 $86
3%62// 

$867


3:,5. N:



/7,7  




+LOIH

,B,67
)B$86

QGHUQ





 $HII
 +]









6HO3DU

'LDJ

Figure 3-134 Operating screen - screen2

List of signals for the operation screen


Table 3-11

List of signals for the operation screen

Signal

Parameters

Short name

Unit

Scaling (100 % =
...)

Speed setpoint upstream of RFG (1)

r1114

NSETP

1/min

p2000

Output frequency (2)

r0024

F_OUT

Hz

Reference
frequency

Output smoothed (3)

r0032

P_ACT

kW

r2004

DC link voltage smoothed (4)

r0026

UDC

p2001

DO: Vector MV
Factory setting (entry no.)

146

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Signal

Parameters

Short name

Unit

Scaling (100 % =
...)

Actual speed smoothed (5)

r0021

N_ACT

1/min

p2000

Absolute actual current smoothed (6)

r0027

I_IST

p2002

Motor temperature (7)

r0035

T_MOT

Reference
temperature

Motor temperature (8)

r0037

T_LT

Reference
temperature

Actual torque smoothed (9)

r0031

M_ACT

Nm

p2003

Converter output voltage smoothed (10)

r0025

C_OUT

p2001

Speed setpoint smoothed

r0020

NSETP

1/min

p2000

Control factor smoothed

r0028

Reference control
factor

Field-producing current component

r0029

p2002

Torque-producing current component

r0030

p2002

Converter overload
Degree of thermal overload

r0036

100 % = Shutdown

Speed setpoint motor encoder

r0061

N_ACT

1/min

p2000

Speed setpoint after filter

r0062

N_ACT

1/min

p2000

Actual speed smoothed

r0063

N_ACT

1/min

p2000

Control deviation

r0064

1/min

p2000

Slip frequency

r0065

Hz

Reference
frequency

Output frequency

r0066

Hz

Reference
frequency

Output voltage

r0072

p2001

Control factor

r0074

Reference control
factor

Torque-generating actual current

r0078

p2002

UACT

Actual torque value

r0080

Nm

p2003

Fixed speed setpoint effective

r1024

1/min

p2000

Active motor potentiometer setpoint

r1050

1/min

p2000

Resulting speed setpoint

r1119

1/min

p2000

Speed controller output

r1508

Nm

p2003

I component of speed controller

r1482

Nm

p2003

PROFIBUS setpoint

r2050

1/min

p2000

Torque utilization smooth

r0033

MUTIL

Motor temperature

r0035

T_MOT

Torque utilization

r0081

MUTIL

Speed setpoint

r1169

NSETP

1/min

p2000

Speed setpoint sum

r1170

NSETP

1/min

p2000

2050

PBSOL

r0026

V DC

p2001

DO: CU_GM
Profibus setpoint
DO: B_InfMV
Vdc smooth

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

147

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Signal

Parameters

Short name

Unit

Power Module temperatures

r0037

LT T

C
Hz

Line frequency

r66

fLine

Profibus setpoint

r2050

PBSOL

Profibus setpoint

r2050

PBSOL

Analog inputs U/I

r4052

AI_UI

Analog inputs %

r4055

AI_%

Scaling (100 % =
...)

DO: TM31

Scaling
Table 3-12

Scaling

Variable

Scaling parameter

Default for quick commissioning

Reference speed

100 % = p2000

p2000 = Maximum speed (p1082)

Reference voltage

100 % = p2001

p2001 = 1000 V

Reference current

100 % = p2002

p2002 = Current limit (p0640)

Reference torque

100 % = p2003

p2003 = 2 x rated motor torque

Reference power

100 % = r2004

Reference frequency
Reference control factor 100 % = Maximum output voltage without
overload
Reference flux

100 % = Rated motor flux

Reference temperature

100% = 100C

3.7.5.2

Control settings

Description
You can set the control keys of the AOP as desired.
Press the Menu key.
Using the function keys or , select the Commissioning/service entry. Press the OK
function key and use the function key to select the AOP settings entry. From this
menu, use the function key to select the entry Control settings The display changes
to the Control settings menu.

148

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
/RNDO0RGHVSHLFKHUQ DNWLY
$XVLQ5HPRWH

1HLQ

/2&$/5(027(DXFKLP%HWULHE
5RWH$867DVWHZLUNWDOV
+LOIH

QGHUQ

1HLQ
1HLQ
$86

]XUFN

Figure 3-135 Control Setting Menu

Using the or function keys, select the desired entry and change it using the Change
key.
Confirm the entries using the Back function key.
You can find the description and setting options for the individual menu items in the
following.

Saving LOCAL mode


Setting Yes (default setting):
The LOCAL MODE operating status is saved when the power supply is switched off and
restored the next time power is switched on.
Setting No:
REMOTE is activated when the supply voltage is switched back on.

Off in remote
Setting Yes:
It is possible to switch off via the OFF key in remote mode
Setting No:
OFF key not in effect in remote mode.
In LOCAL MODE, the OFF key is always in effect.

LOCAL/REMOTE also during operation


Setting Yes:
You can switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is switched on (motor is
running).
Setting No (default setting):
Before the system switches to LOCAL, a check is carried out to determine whether the
drive is in the operating status. If so, the system does not switch to LOCAL and outputs
the error message "Local mode during operation not possible". Before the system
switches to REMOTE, the drive is switched off and the setpoint is set to 0.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

149

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Red OFF key acts as


OFF1 - Ramp-down on the deceleration ramp (p1121). OFF1 is the default setting.
OFF2 - Immediate pulse block, motor coasts to a standstill
OFF3 - Ramp-down on the emergency stop ramp (p1135)
The OFF key is only effective in LOCAL mode.

Red OFF key also in REMOTE


Setting Yes:
It is possible to switch off via the OFF key in remote mode
Setting No:
OFF key not in effect in REMOTE mode.
In local mode, the OFF key is always in effect.

Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
Setting Yes:
In LOCAL MODE, left/right switching is possible using the

key.

Setting No (default setting):


The key is ineffective in LOCAL MODE.
In REMOTE mode, the key is always in effect.
For safety reasons, the CW/CCW key is disabled in the factory setting (pumps and fans must
normally only be operated in one direction). In the Operation status in LOCAL MODE, the
current direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow next to the operating mode.

JOG key active (jogging)


Setting Yes:
In local mode, in "Ready to switch on" status (not in "operate" status), jogging mode is
possible using the JOG key. The speed that is set in parameter p1058 is approached.
Setting No:
In local mode, the JOG key is not in effect.
In remote mode, the JOGkey is never in effect.

Save AOP setpoint


Setting Yes:
and
is saved and automatically
In local mode, setpoint that was set via the key
reset to the setpoint value after the power supply is switched off and on again.
During the switchover from remote to local mode with the drive switched on (motor
running), the current actual value is set as the AOP setpoint and saved.
During the switchover from remote to local mode with the drive switched off, the last
saved AOP setpoint is used.
Setting No:
In local mode, 0 is set as the initial value for the AOP setpoint after the drive is switched
off and back on and also after the power supply is switched off and back on.

150

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
During the switchover from remote to local mode with the drive switched on (motor
running) the current actual value is set as the AOP setpoint.

AOP ramp-up time/AOP ramp-down time


The AOP setpoint ramp-up time and the AOP setpoint ramp-down time determine the time in
which the AOP setpoint will be changed using the + and - keys.
The ramp-up time is in effect for changes to the setpoint of lower or higher (positive or
negative) values, the ramp-down time in the opposite direction.
The times set here also are in effect for the ramp-up and ramp-down times set in the drive.
The default setting for the AOP ramp-up time is 20 seconds, and 30 seconds for the AOP
ramp-down time.
Recommendation: Set the ramp-up/ramp-down time just as for p1120/p1121. Adjusting the
AOP ramp-up/ramp-down time does not affect the setting of parameters p1120 / p1121,
because this is an AOP-specific setting.

Definition of the ramp-up/ramp-down time:


Example: With the ramp-up time set at 50 s, the maximum setpoint is reached by pressing
the + key in 50 s.

See also
The keys of the AOP30 (Page 134)

3.7.5.3

Inhibit functions

Introduction
For protection against unintentional, improper setting of the parameters or accidental use of
the control keys, you can enable various inhibit functions.

The menu structure of the inhibit functions

%HGLHQVSHUUH

6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ

3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH
=XJULIIVWXIH

Calling up the inhibit function menu

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

151

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Press the key with the key symbol.

6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ
%HGLHQVSHUUH
3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH
=XJULIIVWXIH

+LOIH

QLFKWBDNWLY
QLFKWBDNWLY
6WDQGDUG

]XUFN

QGHUQ
QGHUQ

QGHUQ

Figure 3-136 Inhibit functions menu

The various inhibit functions are described in the following.

Operator input inhibit


Parameters can only be changed by entering a password.
Using the function keys or , select the Operator input inhibit function.
Using the Change function key, select the active or not active setting.
active.
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: Note: Inhibit function active.
The OFF key is in effect, the LOCAL/REMOTE, LEFT, RIGHT, INCREASE and
DECREASE keys are disabled.
The inhibit function is displayed by the key symbol
.
not active
No restriction of operation.
Save the setting by pressing the Back function key.

Parameterization inhibit
Against unauthorized parameterization (password-protected)
It is possible to control the drive.
Using the function keys or , select the parameterization inhibit function.

152

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Using the Change function key, select the active or not active setting.
active.
A window appears on the display for inputting and confirming a password. Enter an
ID number (up to 7 digits).
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: Parameterization inhibit - no control command
acceptance.
The control keys are not inhibited.
The inhibit is indicated by the key symbol
.
If you have forgotten the password, you can switch off the parameterization inhibit as
follows:
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Pull out the RS232 data cable.
3. Switch on the power supply and press and hold the key with the key symbol for 20
seconds. The key symbol
extinguishes.
not active
No restriction of operation.
Save the setting by pressing the Back function key.

Access level
The scope of the displayed parameters conforms to the set access level.
The access level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed.
The higher the access level, the more functions are available.
The following access levels are possible:
Access level

Functions

1: Default

Sufficient for simple applications. The default setting is "1 standard".

2: Extended
3: Expert

The structure of the function can be changed by interconnecting BICO


parameters. This setting should only be carried out by experts.

4: Special access

In this access level, additional menu entries and parameters are displayed. A
password is required upon activation. Enter the password "2816."

Using the function keys or , select the Access level function.


Using the Change function key, select the desired access level.
Exit the menu by pressing the Back function key.
Note
Changing the access levels
When you change the access level (e.g. from access level 2 to access level 3), you have to
select (during the device commissioning) the status 0: Ready. For further information, refer
to chapter Commissioning/Service Device Commissioning.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

153

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.6

Menu description and setting options

3.7.6.1

Introduction (AOP menus)


The individual menus of the AOPs with their setting options are described in the following.
To make things easier for you, the respective section of the menu structure is illustrated at
the beginning of each chapter.

3.7.6.2

Operation screen

The menu structure of the operation screen


+LOIH

$NWXHOOH
6WUXQJHQ

6HO3DU

$NWXHOOH
:DUQXQJHQ

QGHUQ

$OWH6WUXQJHQ

'LDJ

$OWH:DUQXQJHQ

+DXSWPHQ

%HWULHEVPDVNH

Figure 3-137 Menu structure of the operation screens

The operation screen


The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the drive:
In the factory setting, the following values are displayed:
Operation status of the drive
Direction of motor rotation
Time
10 parameters (numerical display)
9(&725 $86
9B'&

9
$867


3:,5. 
N:
7B/7
 r&
,4,67

$HII

+LOIH

154

QGHUQ

,B,67
)B$86
/7,7
,',67
8B$86







6HO3DU


 $HII
 +]
 
 $HII
 9HII

'LDJ

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Operation screen

Calling up operation screens


There are three options for calling up the operation screens :
After the power up has concluded, press the F5 key or
Wait for five minutes (do not press any buttons). The operation screen is automatically
called up, or
In the main menu, select the Operation screen and press the Selection key.
Note
When there is a fault, the fault screen is automatically displayed.

Further settings
You can adjust the shape of the display and the displayed values to your liking. You can find
more detailed information on this in the section Defining Operation Screens.

The other menus of the operation screen


The menus that you can call up from the operation screen using the function keys are
described below.
Function key

Function

Sel. Par.

Selects a parameter (value or bar) of the operation screen.

Help

Call up of an explanatory help text for the selected display. This help text
describes which parameter of the display forms the basis, for example.

change

Calls up the Define operation screen menu:


You can find more detailed information on this in the section Defining
Operation Screens.

Diag.

Calling up the Fault memory/alarm memory menu.


In this menu, the queue of active faults and alarms is displayed. You can find
further information on alarms and faults in chapter "Alarms and Faults".
You can select the following fault and alarm menus.

Current faults
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active faults.
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.
Press the Ack. function key to acknowledge the fault.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

155

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Current alarms
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active alarms.
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.

Old faults
This menu displays the number and titles of the old faults. The top line shows the total
number of faults and the time of the fault (time at which the fault occurred). The faults are
displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged fault messages by selecting
older or newer.

Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.

Old alarms
This menu displays the number and titles of the old alarms. The top line shows the total
number of alarms and the time of the alarm (time at which the alarm occurred). The alarms
are displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged alarms by selecting older or
newer.

3.7.6.3

Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.

Parameterization

Parameterization menu structure


The menus that can be called up via the function keys in the Parameterization menu are
described in the following.

+DXSWPHQ

(LQ]HOQHV'2

$OOH'2
3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
3HUPDQHQWH
3DUDPHWHUEHUQDKPH

Figure 3-138 Parameterization menu structure

156

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Calling up menu parameterization


Press the Menu key.
Using the function key , select the Parameterization line and confirm with the OK key.
Using the function keys or , select the desired selection and confirm with the OK
key.

Individual DO
The parameter lists for the individual DriveObjects can be opened in the displayed menu.
Using the function keys or , select the desired DO and confirm the selection with OK
.
Select the desired parameters using the or function keys or by entering the
parameter number at the keypad.
Note
Parameters with identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than
one drive object, e.g. p0005.

By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.

All DOs
In this menu, a numerically sorted list of the parameters of all of the DOs is displayed. In this
list, the same parameter number can appear several times. At the top left, you see the
number of the DO to which the parameter belongs in brackets.
Select the desired parameters using the or function keys or by entering the
parameter number on the keypad. Parameters with identical functions may exist with
the same parameter number in more than one drive object, e.g. p0005.
By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

157

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Selecting data sets


'DWHQVDW ]DXVZDKO
7\S
%HIHKOV'6
$QWULHEV'6
0RWRU'6

+LOIH

F
G
P



0D[ 'ULYH $23





 




 




 


]XUFN

2.

Figure 3-139 Selecting data sets

In this menu, you can parameterize the following data sets:


Command Data Set
Drive data set
Motor Data Set
Tachometer generator data set
Power unit Data Set
The data set number set under "AOP" determines which index (data set) of assigned
parameters is displayed in the AOP (regardless of which data set is currently active in the
drive)

Example of a data set selection


The main setpoints in terminal mode and PROFIBUS mode can be set separately via two
command data sets (if this was parameterized this way beforehand).
in terminal mode p1070[1] 1), REMOTE MODE 1 and
in PROFIBUS mode p1070[0] 1), REMOTE MODE 0
1) The

command data set that must be enabled for setting the relevant main setpoint is
indicated in the square parentheses of the parameter []. In the factory setting, command data
set 0 is active.

Permanent parameter acceptance


With the aid of this menu, the parameters are saved on the CompactFlash card.
You can find further information on this in section "Permanently Saving the Parameters".

158

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.6.4

Fault/alarm memory

Menu structure of the fault memory/alarm memory menu


+DXSWPHQ

6WUVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU

Figure 3-140 Menu structure for fault memory/alarm memory

Alarm overview
If a fault occurs, the drive displays the fault and/or alarm on the operator panel in the Alarm
overview.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error occurred
and the time it was rectified. The time stamp relates to the relative system time in
milliseconds (r0969).
The diagram below shows that currently at least one active fault/alarm is present for the
"VECTOR" drive object. The two other drive objects are fault-free.
$ODUPRYHUYLHZ

&8B*
9(&725
70


)DXOW





$ODUP

7RROV

'LDJ

Figure 3-141 Alarm overview

By pressing the Diag. key, you call up the Display diagnostics key. In this menu, you
can display the current and old faults and alarms.
^9(&725`'LDJQRVHDQ]HLJHQ

$NWXHOOH6WUXQJHQ
$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
DOWH6WUXQJHQ
DOWH:DUQXQJHQ



=XUFN

2.

Figure 3-142 Display diagnosis

You can find further information on alarms and faults in chapter "Operation Screens".

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

159

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
The list of faults and alarms indicates the type of response (OFF1, OFF2, and so on) for
each fault message.

Displaying faults
Faults are displayed by the red FAULT LED. Any faults that have occurred are automatically
displayed. Up to eight faults occurring at the same time are displayed.
Using the function keys or , select the fault.
You can acknowledge the fault by pressing the Ack. function key. The operation screen
is displayed.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for clearing the fault.
9(&725 6WUXQJHQ
)
)

+LOIH

+DXSWQHW]VFKDOWHUB
(UGVFKOXVV6WUXQJ

]XU FN

4XLWW

Figure 3-143 Fault screen

What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not result in the
drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.

Displaying alarms
Alarms are indicated by the yellow ALARM LED. In addition, a corresponding note regarding
the cause will be displayed on the operator panel. Up to eight faults occurring at the same
time are displayed.

160

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

9(&725 :DUQXQJHQ
+

(UGVFKOXVVZDUQXQJDNWLY

]XU FN

+LOIH

&OHDU

Figure 3-144 Alarm screen

3.7.6.5

Commissioning / service drive commissioning

Menu structure for commissioning/service drive commissioning


*UXQG
LQEHWULHEQDKPH

+DXSWPHQ

,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH

$QWULHEV
LQEHWULHEQDKPH

.RPSOHWW
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
0RWRU
LGHQGLILNDWLRQ
/IWHUODXI]HLW
]XUFNVHW]HQ

Figure 3-145 Menu structure for commissioning/service drive commissioning

Press the Menu key.


Using the function key , select the Commissioning/service line and confirm with the
OK key.
Using the function key , select the Drive commissioning line and confirm with the OK
key.
Using the function key , select the desired menu item.

Basic Commissioning
In this menu, the following parameters can be set:
Table 3-13

Drive Object VectorMV

Parameter

Parameter text

p700[0]

Macro binector input (BI)

p1000[0]

Macro connector inputs (CI) for speed setpoints

p1070[0]

CI: Main setpoint

p1080[0]

Minimum speed

p1082[0]

Maximum speed

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

161

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter

Parameter text

p1120[0]

Ramp-function generator ramp-up time

p1121[0]

Ramp-function generator ramp-down time

p1135[0]

OFF3 ramp-down time

These are the parameters that are entered in the basic parameterization. Also see chapter
"Basic Parameterization with the AOP30".

Complete commissioning
In this menu, all of the parameters of the basic parameterization except for the parameters of
the DO B_Infeed can be set. More detailed information is available in Chapter "Basic
Parameterization with the AOP30".

Motor Identification
This function has not yet been implemented and will be made available at a later point in
time.

Resetting the fan runtime


You can reset the ventilation meter in this menu. This is necessary after a fan change.
Using the key, select Reset runtime.
Confirm with OK. This also clears alarm A30042.
9(&725 B /I WHUODXI ]HLW
/IWHUODXI]HLW

6WXQGHQ
/DXI ]HLWU FNVHW ]HQ

+LOIH

]XUFN

2.

Figure 3-146 Reset fan time

162

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.6.6

Commissioning / service device commissioning

Menu structure for commissioning/service device commissioning


+DXSWPHQ

%HUHLW

*HUWH
LQEHWULHEQDKPH

,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH

*HUWHNRQILJXUDWLRQ

)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S

$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ

'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ

3DUDPHWHUUHVHW

Figure 3-147 Menu structure for commissioning/service device commissioning

Press the Menu key.


Using the function key , select the Commissioning/service line and confirm with the
OK key.
Using the function key , select the Device commissioning line and confirm with the OK
key.
The menus marked with * only appear if the "special access" access level was selected

Device Commissioning Menu


This expert menu supports the device commissioning controlled via p0009.
Select a commissioning level.
The parameters that can only be written in the enabled commissioning level are
displayed.
It is thus easier to make changes such as:
switching units or
activating function modules
Set the p0009 parameter to 0: Ready to finish commissioning.
*HUWHLQEHWULHEQDKPHS     
 %HUHLW
*HUWHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ

+LOIH

]XUFN

2.

Figure 3-148 Device commissioning

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

163

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Using the function keys or , select the desired parameter and confirm with the OK
key.
0: Ready = The device commissioning is concluded.
1: Device configuration = At the first commissioning of the devices, after run-up, the
device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the internal automatic first
commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for
the actual topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology
(p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single index value of p0099[x] the same
as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried-out, in this
state, when required, other basic device configuration parameters can be adapted
(e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
2: Determining drive type = The drive object types and/or the function modules for
individual drive objects can be changed or selected. To this end, the drive object
type can be set via p0107[0...15] and the function module can be set via
p0108[0...15] (see p0101[0...15])
3: Drive basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling
times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
4. Data basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, for the individual drive objects changes can be made regarding the
assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the
individual data sets and the assignment of the power module, motor and encoder to
the drive data sets (p0185, and onwards).
30: parameter reset = In order to bring the complete unit into the "first
commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved with p0977, p0009 must first
be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
You will find a list of the settable parameters below

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 3-14
Parameter

Overview of important parameters (equipment commissioning)


Parameter text
Device configuration

p0092

164

Synchronous PROFIBUS operation, pre-assignment/check

p0097

Select drive object type

r0098[0]

Device actual topology, DRIVE-CLIQ socket X100

p0099[0]

Device target topology, DRIVE-CLIQ socket X100

p0101[0]

Drive objects numbers, drive object number Control Unit

p0978[0]

List of drive objects

p2042

PROFIBUS ID Number

p9904

Topology comparison, acknowledge differences

p9905

Device specialization

p9906

Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components

p9907

Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter

Parameter text

p9908

Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component

p9909

Topology comparison, component replacement

p9910

Taking on additional components in the setpoint topology

p9915

DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, master

p9916

DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, slave


Definition of drive type
DO CU_GM

P0103[0]

Application-specific view

p0107[0]

Drive objects type, drive object Control Unit

p0108[0]

Drive objects function module, function module control unit


Drive data basic configuration
DO VECTORMV

p0112

Sampling time pre-setting p0115

p0115[0]

Sampling times for internal control loops, current controller

r0116[0][

Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object

p0120

Power Module data sets (PDS) number

p0130

Motor data sets (MDS) number

p0140

Encoder data sets (EDS) number

p0170

Command data set (CDS) number

p0180

Drive data set (DDS) number

r6672[0]

Switch switch-on time measured, switch 0

r6673[0]

Switch switch-off time measured, switch 0

p6674[0]

Switch switch-on monitoring time, switch 0

p6675[0]

Switch switch-off monitoring time, switch 0

p6681[0]

Switch On/Off commands pulse time, switch 0

p6683[0]

Switch bounce time, switch 0

p0112

Sampling time pre-setting p0115

p0115[0]

Sampling times for internal control loops, current controller

p0120

Power Module data sets (PDS) number

p0170

Command data set (CDS) number

r6672[0]

Switch switch-on time measured, switch 0

r6673[0]

Switch switch-off time measured, switch 0

p6674[0]

Switch switch-on monitoring time, switch 0

p6675[0]

Switch switch-off monitoring time, switch 0

p6681[0]

Switch On/Off commands pulse time, switch 0

p6683[0]

Switch bounce time, switch 0

DO B_Inf

DO CU-GM
p0115[0]

Sampling times for additional functions, basic sampling time

r0116[0][

Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object

p0799

CU inputs/outputs, sampling time


TM15DI_DO

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

165

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter

Parameter text

P4099

TM15 DI/DO inputs/outputs, sampling time


Data basic configuration
DO CU_GM

r0197

Loader 1 version

r0198

Loader 2 version

p0121[0]

Power module component number

r0126[0]

Power unit components active/inactive

p0131[0]

Motor component number

p0141[0]

Sensor interface (sensor module) component number

p0142[0]

Sensor component number

p0145[0]

Enable/disable sensor interface

p0146[0]

Sensor interface active/inactive

DO VECTORMV

p0186[0]

Motor data sets (MDS) number

p0187[0]

Encoder 1 encoder data set number

p0188[0]

Encoder 2 encoder data set number

p0189[0]

Encoder 3 encoder data set number


TM15DI_DO

p0151

Terminal module component number

Note
Changing the access levels
When you change the access level (e.g., from access level 2 to access level 3), you must
select in a intermediate step status 0: Ready. You can find additional information on the
access levels in Chapter: Inhibit Functions in Section Access Levels.

3.7.6.7

Commissioning / Service - AOP settings

Commissioning/Service - AOP settings menu structure

166

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

+DXSWPHQ

6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ

,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH

%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ

$23
(LQVWHOOXQJHQ

'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ

$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XUFNVHW]HQ

Figure 3-149 Commissioning/Service - AOP settings menu structure

Calling up AOP settings


Press the Menu key.
Using the function key , select the Commissioning/service line and confirm with the
OK key.
Using the function key , select the AOP settings line and confirm with the OK key.
Using the function keys or , select the desired setting and confirm with the OK key.
* The "Expanded settings" menu only appears if the "special access" access level was
selected.

Control settings
In this menu, you can set the functions that the control keys of the AOP should carry out. For
example, you can select whether the OFF key of the AOP is assigned the function OFF1,
OFF2 or OFF3.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Control settings".

Display settings
In this menu, you can make the following AOP settings:
Illumination (on, off after 2 minutes, off)
intensity of illumination
Contrast

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

167

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ

(LQ



%HOHXFKWXQJ
%HOHXFKWXQJVVWUNH
.RQWUDVW

]XUFN

QGHUQ

Figure 3-150 Display settings

Select the desired setting using the function key.


Change the setting using the Change function key.
Confirm the setting using the Back function key.

Defining the operation screen


In this menu, you can define what parameters the operation screen should display.
A DriveObject (DO) selection is offered on each display. In turn, the corresponding
parameter list is offered to each DO. It is possible to select and assign all of the parameters
(p and r). In addition, a selection of plausible displayable parameters is displayed for each
DO.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Defining Operating Screens".

Setting the date/time


In this menu, you can set the date and time.

8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ


'DWXP WWPPMMMM 



=HLW 66PPVV 
6\QFKURQLVDWLRQ

&

NHLQH

VSHLFKHUQ

$EEUXFK

Figure 3-151 Date and time of day

Select the desired setting using the function key.


Change the setting using the number keys. You can delete incorrect entries using the
C function key.

168

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Select the synchronization line. Make the desired setting.
None
The AOP time is managed internally and displayed in the upper right of the
operating screen. It has no function other than this
AOPDRIVE
The AOP time is recorded in the drive each time the AOP is powered up and daily
at 2:00 AM. If a valid synchronization is detected, the time stamp for faults and
alarms is displayed on the AOP in real time.
DRIVE AOP
This operating status requires that the drive be connected to and synchronized by a
master clock. Every time the AOP is powered up, and daily at 2:00 AM, the time of
the drive is adopted as the time of the AOP. If a valid synchronization is detected,
the time stamp for faults and alarms is displayed on the AOP in real time.
Select Save and confirm the setting with OK.

Expanded settings
In this menu, you can make the following extended settings:
Load the AOP settings from the CU
Automatically acknowledge topology
Mixed operation of servo/vector
Database mode for the test bay

(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQYRQ&XODGHQ
7RSRORJLHDXWRPDWLVFKTXLWWLHUHQ
0LVFKEHWULHEYRQ6(5929(&725
'DWHQEDQN0RGXVIU3UIIHOG

-D
-D
1HLQ
1HLQ

]XUFN

QGHUQ

Figure 3-152 Expanded settings

Select the desired setting using the function key.


Change the setting using the Change function key.
Confirm the setting using the Back function key.

Load the AOP settings from the CU


Each time the power supply of the AOP is switched on, the AOP settings are read by the
drive. This makes it possible to swap AOPs without losing the settings.
If Download AOP settings from CU is set to "No," settings can be transferred from one drive
to another with an AOP.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

169

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Automatically acknowledge topology


If the AOP is connected to a drive that has not yet saved a setpoint topology (p99=r98), this
is normally carried out automatically by the AOP. This function can be shut down in this way

Mixed operation of servo/vector


This function is not supported.

Database mode for the test bay


If the AOP is connected to a drive unit with a changed topology or changed software version,
the database is deleted and rebuilt. For the special application scenario of device testing (for
example, a MoMo is redefined to an ALM during the course of the testing), the database
mode for the test bay can be enabled. This shuts off the automatic deletion of the database.

Resetting the AOP settings


In this menu, you reset the following settings to their default setting:
Language
Display settings
Operation screen
Control settings
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQUFNVHW ]HQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQUFNVHW ]HQ
6WHXHU XQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
-D
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HWU1HLQ
LHEVPDVNHGHI LQLHUHQ
'DWXP8KU ]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XUFNVHW ]HQ

2.

Figure 3-153 Resetting the AOP settings

Using the function key, select the setting Yes or No.


Yes:
all settings that are different from the factory settings are reset immediately. This
may cause the converter to switch to a different, unwanted operational status.
No
The values are not reset
Confirm the setting by clicking OK.
The settings become active immediately.

170

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

3.7.6.8

Commissioning/Service - AOP diagnostics

Commissioning/Service - AOP diagnostics menu structure

6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
+DXSWPHQ
%DWWHULH]XVWDQG
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
$23
'LDJQRVH

,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH

7DVWDWXUWHVW
/('7HVW
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ

3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNOVFKHQ

Figure 3-154 Commissioning/Service - AOP diagnostics menu structure

Press the Menu key.


Using the function key , select the Commissioning/service line and confirm with the
OK key.
Using the function key , select the AOP diagnostics line and confirm with the OK key.
Using the function keys or , select the desired setting and confirm with the OK key.
* These menus only appear if the "special access" access level was selected

Software/database version
6RI W ZDUH'DWHQEDQN YHUVLRQ
)DEU LNQXPPHU
 7'
0/)%  1XPPHU
6/$ $  &$ 
)LU PZDUH
  
'DWXP  =HLW
         

]XUFN

Figure 3-155 Software/database version

The following is displayed:


Serial number
MLFB number
Firmware
Date/time
Database

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

171

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

Battery status
Shows the charging state of the AOP battery. The battery ensures that the data in the
database and the current time are retained. A battery voltage of 2 V is equal to 0%, and a
voltage of 3 V is equal to 100%. The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V.
If the battery voltage is 2.45 V, the message "Replace battery" is displayed.
If the battery voltage is 2.30 V, the following message: "Warning: weak battery" is
displayed.
If the battery voltage is 2 V, the message "Attention: The battery is dead" is displayed.
If the drive is not activated for a long period of time, the time and status of the database
might not be displayed because of insufficient battery voltage. In this case, messages
appear that prompt you to replace the battery, load the database and set the time.
Information on replacing the battery can be found in the operating instructions of the
converter in Chapter Maintenance and Servicing.
%DW WHU LH]XVWDQG

9

%DWWHULHVSDQQXQJ






]XUFN

Figure 3-156 Battery status

Communication
In this menu, the status of the communication between AOP30 and CU are displayed. The
following items are displayed:
Number of fault-free message frames
Number of faulty message frames
Number of character frame faults
Number of overflow errors
Number of start limiter errors
Number of end limiter errors
Number of character length errors
Number of frame test mark errors
Number of frame test mark errors
Number of frame transfer errors
Number of layer 2 message frame failures
PPI status
Number of layer 7 message frame failures
Number of message frame repetitions (SD2)

172

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
)HKOHUIUHLH7HOHJUDPPH
IHKOHUKDIWH7HOHJUDPPH
=HLFKHQ)UDPH)HKOHU
3DULWWVIHKOHU
EHUODXI)HKOHU
6WDUWEHJUHQ]HU)HKOHU








]XUFN

Figure 3-157 Menu Communication

Keyboard test
In this menu, the function of each individual key of the AOP is tested. Keys that you press
are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press the keys in any order
you wish. If each key has been pressed at least once, you can exit the menu by pressing the
Back key.
You can also exit the keyboard test menu by pressing and holding any key.

LED test
In this menu, the LEDs of the AOP can be function tested.

Flash FS formatting
The ACX files, which the drive reads for describing the parameters and alarms, are
temporarily saved in the flash file system (and then deleted after parsing)
To rule out the risk of files remaining behind, the Flash FS can be manually deleted via this
menu item.
NOTICE
The formatting of the flash memory begins without further prompting immediately after you
press OK.
Note
The CompactFlash card is not formatted.

Delete persistent database


The database with all of the parameters and alarm descriptions of the discovered topology is
saved in battery-backed up RAM and will be available again after the power supply is
switched off and back on again.
The database can be manually deleted via this menu item. It will be rebuilt during the next
power up.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

173

Start

Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel

NOTICE
The database is deleted immediately, without further confirmation, after pressing OK.

3.7.6.9

Language

Language menu structure


+DXSWPHQ

6SUDFKH

Figure 3-158 Language menu structure

Selecting a language
Press the Menu key.
Using the function key , select the Language line and confirm with the OK key.
Using the function key , select the desired language.
German
English
French
Italian
Chinese
Confirm with the OK function key.

174

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.1

Overview of parameter macro interconnections in table format

Overview
The table below provides an overview of the parameter macros and the signals
interconnected by the different macros. For a detailed description of the specific parameters
of a macro and the terminals and item codes assigned to these parameters, refer to the
section entitled "Parameters for Interconnecting Signals (Page 318) "
Table 4-1

Overview of parameter macro interconnections in table format

Macro
Autostart macros
PM001501 on VECTORMV

Default interconnections

PM001540 on VECTORMV

Default interconnections

PM001540 on B_INFMV

Default interconnections

Optional macros
PM001555

Interconnections for option G66, diagnostic module PADU 8

PM001557

Analog O PSA interconnections for options K21 and K20

PM001558

Analog O PSA interconnections for options K22 and K20

PM001571

Interconnections for option Emergency Button 1

PM001580

Interconnections for lamps and StartStop button

PM001582

Interconnections for option L27-L29 Bypass 1

PM001584

Interconnections for option L55 standstill heating

PM001585

Interconnections for options N20, N21 capacitor tripping device


circuit breaker

4.2

Conduct signal check

Check hardware interfaces


After you have loaded the configuration of your project into the drive unit, check the
hardware interfaces (signal check) based on the circuit diagrams.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

175

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

Note
Observe that the following protection settings have already been specified via the product
designation (MLFB) and tested in the routine testing:
Current and voltage limits
Command "short-circuiter ON"
Command "TAS ON

Ground fault monitoring


The check of the threshold values set for the ground connection monitoring as per the circuit
diagram only takes place during the commissioning.
WARNING
Safety information regarding personnel protection
Opening the doors during operation can lead to death or serious bodily injury.
While operating, the converter is subjected to dangerous voltages.
Check the door locks during commissioning!

4.3

Conducting hardware tests

4.3.1

Introduction
Various hardware tests are required to ensure the converter is working correctly.
The tests listed in the "Mandatory hardware tests" section check the safety-related
components and are compulsory.
The tests listed in the "Recommended hardware tests" section check the peripherals. It is
advisable to perform these tests, too.

176

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

4.3.2

Required hardware tests

4.3.2.1

Circuit-breaker test
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
No power may be supplied to the converter when operating the circuit breaker in test mode.
Failure to observe this warning may result in serious injury or death.
There are various ways of making sure the unit is isolated from the power supply:
Confirm that the circuit breaker is switched to the TEST position.
Confirm that the medium-voltage power supply is switched off.
Do not connect the cable from the switch to the converter.

Requirements
The external interconnection between the control signals and the check-back signals from
the circuit breaker to the controller must be installed.

Test mode
The test mode is activated using parameters p6650 and p6651.
Set parameter p6650 to "Test mode line breaker (1)" in the infeed.

Figure 4-1

Circuit breaker test mode power supply

Connect an ON signal (binary signal or simulation mode binary input) to parameter


p6651. The circuit breaker switch-on signal is activated by the leading edge.

Figure 4-2

Enabling/disabling circuit breaker test mode

Control parameters
Parameters p6690 and r6672 to r6676 are available for use as control parameters.
Parameter p6690 shows the status of the check-back signal from the circuit breaker.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

177

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

Figure 4-3

Status of circuit breaker check-back signals

The opening and monitoring times are given by parameters r6672 to r6676.

Figure 4-4

Opening and monitoring times

Note
The interrupting time must not exceed 100 ms.

Concluding the circuit breaker test


Once you have successfully completed operation in test mode, reset parameters p6650
and p6651.

4.3.2.2

Test of the make-proof grounding switch and the pre-charging

Precharging test mode


Set parameter 6650 to 2 (precharging test mode) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.
Set parameter p6620 to the required setpoint for DC link precharging in the Infeed.

178

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

Figure 4-5

Record: Test mode precharging; P6620 = 75 %

Note
The two DC links must be precharged to the set value.
The DC links are regularly recharged to this value.
Check whether the two DC link halves are charging symmetrically.

Switching off the precharging and testing the fault initiating switch
The switch key can only be inserted if the value has dropped below 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal
after the waiting period has elapsed!
NOTICE
The switch key can no longer be inserted during precharging of the DC-link beyond a value
of 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal!
The make-proof grounding switch must never be actuated if the auxiliary power is switched
off!
The make-proof grounding switch can only be activated if the DC-link voltage has dropped
to below 1% of the nominal DC-link voltage and a waiting period of 125s/44s has elapsed.

Switch off the auxiliary power supply (1 AC 230 V). The switch key must not be
inserted.
Check the check-back signals of the make-proof grounding switch.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

179

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

4.3.2.3

Testing the door interlocking and the door limit switch

Description
The doors are only unlocked if:
the grounding switch has been engaged and
the insulation monitoring has reported "ground connection."
Check the locking mechanism by actuating the door handles several times.

Test of the door lock


The doors cannot be opened if:
the value of the DC-line voltage has dropped below a value of 0.01 x Uzk_Nom.
the waiting period has elapsed.
the grounding switch has been actuated.
the insulation monitoring has reported "ground connection."
The doors can not be opened in any case, if the auxiliary power supply is switched off.
Switch off the auxiliary power 1 AC 230 V. The doors must remain locked

Test of the door limit switch


When the door limit switch is tripped in the switched off state, a corresponding fault message
appears. Switching on the converter is locked out.
Open the doors in succession in the switched off state. A fault message must appear
and the converter must not be possible to switch on.
Acknowledge the fault message after closing the corresponding doors.

4.3.2.4

Test of the pre-charging and of the line switch

Description
There are two use cases for this test:
If there is no power being supplied to the circuit breaker, the level of the DC link voltage
at which the circuit breaker should cut in can be adjusted. This also activates the
undervoltage tripping level when the DC link voltage decays.
Testing the switching sequence for precharging and circuit breakers

180

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

Test of the precharging and of the line breaker


Set parameter P6650 to 10 (precharging/line breaker test mode) in the Infeed .
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.

Figure 4-6

4.3.2.5

Record: Test mode precharging with circuit breaker

Testing the EMERGENCY STOP button

Interconnecting the EMERGENCY STOP button


By default, pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button causes an OFF2 (coast down) of the
machine and triggers the circuit breaker mechanically. If option L60 (Emergency Off Stop
Category 1) is activated, the circuit breaker is not triggered mechanically, and the machine is
shut down by means of an OFF3 signal.
Note
This manual does not go into further detail about testing in accordance with the machine
directives.

Triggering the external safety circuit


If the external safety circuit is triggered, this always causes an OFF2 (coast down) of the
machine and also triggers the circuit breaker mechanically.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

181

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests

Additional test modes in the Infeed_1 object.

The following test modes can be selected with P6650:

The selected test mode is activated by p6651.

Additional test modes in the Drive_1 object.

The following test modes can be selected with p6650:

To activate the test mode, a binary input from a TM module must be wired to p6651 and an
H signal must be specified on the input. Setting p6651 to 1 is not sufficient.

4.3.3

Recommended hardware tests

4.3.3.1

Test of the main fans

Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The main fans in the power unit are activated when the converter is switched on.
As soon as the fans have run up, the nominal differential pressure is reached.
If, after the switch-on monitoring time has elapsed, the differential pressure is not higher than
the set threshold value, an alarm or a fault shutdown will occur with the corresponding
message.

Test mode of the main fans


Connect the auxiliary voltage for the main fans and the motor protection switch.

182

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Set parameter p6650 to 4 (main fan test mode infeed) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.
After the time specified in p6794 has elapsed, the differential pressure (r6801) must
have been established and must be well above the warning threshold (r6790).
Switch off the motor protection switch of one fan.
The shutdown of the motor protection switch of one fan should lead to the fault
shutdown with the following error message:
"49110 fan monitoring: Differential pressure < interference
threshold"
Note
Test of the main fans for the sinusoidal filter option (Y15)
If you set the sinusoidal filter option, then also check the associated fans.
The activation takes place together with the other main fans.

4.3.3.2

Test of the redundant main fan

Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The redundant main fan is activated if one of the main fans for normal operation fails during
operation.

Test mode of the redundant main fan:


Set parameter p6650 to 6 (redundant main fan test mode) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode on parameter
P6651 using a switch box.
Only the redundant main fan should switch on when you switch the power supply on.

4.3.3.3

Test of the auxiliary fans

Description
The auxiliary fans are activated

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

183

Start

Commissioning (hardware)
4.4 Checking the signal wiring
by the temperature evaluation unit, if the temperature in the converter exceeds the set
value (T2).
From the software if the crowbar is triggered or the test mode of the auxiliary fans is
selected.
Note
The protection switch for the auxiliary fans must be switched on.

Test mode of the auxiliary fans:


Set parameter p6650 to 7 (auxiliary fan test mode) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode on parameter
P6651 using a switch box.
All of the auxiliary fans in the converter should switch on when you switch the power
supply on.
Set parameter p6650 to 12 (crowbar test mode) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.
After the crowbar is triggered, all of the auxiliary fans in the converter must engage and
then switch off again after 30 minutes.

4.4

Checking the signal wiring

4.4.1

Potential concept

Description
A noise-free connection between the internal and external supply voltage can be achieved
by connecting the 0 V potentials to each other and grounding them. This also eliminates the
need for the control circuit insulation monitor required by DIN EN 60204-1.

3
1

3

0

0

,QWHUQDO
FRQVXPHUV

Figure 4-7

184

([WHUQDO
FRQVXPHUV

Potential concept

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.1

Parameters

Parameter types
The following adjustable and display parameters are available:
Adjustable parameters (write/read)
These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function.
Example: Ramp-up and ramp-down time of a ramp function generator
Display parameters (read only)
These parameters are used to display internal variables.
Example: Current motor current
3DUDPHWHU
UHDG U
%,&2RXWSXW

Figure 5-1

1RUPDO
UHDGRQO\SDUDPHWHUV

UHDGZULWH S
%,&2LQSXW

1RUPDO
UHDGZULWHSDUDPHWHUV

Parameter types

All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms
defined in the PROFIdrive profile.

Parameter categories
The parameters of the individual drive objects are categorized into data sets as follows:
Data-set-independent parameters
These parameters exist only once per drive object.
Data-set-dependent parameters
These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via
the parameter index for reading and writing. A distinction is made between various types
of data set:
CDS: Command Data Set
By configuring several command data sets and switching between them, the drive can
be operated with different pre-configured signal sources.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

185

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.1 Parameters
DDS: Drive Data Set
The drive data set contains the parameters for switching between different drive
control configurations.
The CDS and DDS can be switched over during normal operation. Further types of data set
also exist, however these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS switchover.
EDS Encoder Data Set
MDS Motor Data Set
7HUPLQDO0RGXOH
2SWLRQ%RDUG
6XSSO\
'ULYHQ
'ULYH
'ULYH
'DWDVHWLQGHSHQGHQW
GULYHSDUDPHWHUV

&'6&RPPDQG'DWD6HW

''6'ULYH'DWD6HW

0RWRUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ


('6(QFRGHU'DWD6HW

0'60RWRU'DWD6HW

Figure 5-2

Parameter categories

Saving parameters in a non-volatile memory


The modified parameter values are stored in the volatile RAM. When the drive system is
switched off, this data is lost.
The data has to be saved as follows in a non-volatile manner on the CompactFlash card so
that it is available the next time the drive is switched on.

186

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.1 Parameters
Save parameters - device and all drives
p0977 = 1; automatically reset to 0
Save the parameters with STARTER
See "Copy RAM to ROM" function

Resetting parameters
The parameters can be reset to the factory setting as follows:
Reset parameters - current drive object
p0970 = 1; automatically reset to 0
Reset parameters - all parameters drive object "Control Unit"
p0009 = 30 parameter reset
p0976 = 1; automatically reset to 0

Access level
The parameters are subdivided into access levels. The List Manual specifies in which access
level the parameter is displayed and can be changed. The required access levels 0 to 4 can
be set in p0003.
Table 5-1

Access levels

Access level

Remark

0 User-defined

Parameter from the user-defined list (p0013)

1 Standard

Parameters for the simplest operator functions (e.g. p1120 = ramp function
generator ramp-up time).

2 Extended

Parameters to handle the basic functions of the device.

3 Expert

Expert knowledge is already required for this parameter (e.g. knowledge


about BICO parameterization).

4 Service

Please contact your local Siemens office for the password for parameters
with access level 4 (Service). It must be entered into p3950.

Note
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

187

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.2 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals

5.2

BICO technology: Interconnecting signals

5.2.1

Binectors and Connectors

Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.

Binectors, BI: Binector Input, BO: Binector Output


A binector is a digital (binary) signal without a unit that can assume the value 0 or 1.
Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs (signal sink) and binector outputs (signal
source).
Table 5-2

Binectors

Abbreviation and symbol

Name

Description

BI

Binector input

Can be interconnected to a binector output as


source.

Binector input

BO

(signal sink)

The number of the binector output must be


entered as a parameter value.

Binector output

Can be used as a source for a binector input.

Binector output
(signal source)

Connectors, CI: Connector Input, CO: Connector Output


A connector is a digital signal, e.g. in 32-bit format. It can be used to depict words (16 bits),
double words (32 bits) or analog signals. Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs
(signal sink) and connector outputs (signal source).
The options for interconnecting connectors are restricted to ensuring that performance is not
adversely affected.

188

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.2 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals
Table 5-3

Connectors

Abbreviation and symbol

Name

Description

CI

Connector input

Can be interconnected to a connector output as


source.

Connector input

CO

(signal sink)

The number of the connector output must be


entered as a parameter value.

Connector output

Can be used as a source for a connector input.

Connector output
(signal source)

5.2.2

Interconnecting signals using BICO technology

Description
To interconnect two signals, a BICO input parameter (signal sink) must be assigned to the
desired BICO output parameter (signal source).
The following information is required in order to connect a binector/connector input to a
binector/connector output:
Binectors: Parameter number, bit number, and drive object ID
Connectors without an index: Parameter number and drive object ID
Connectors with an index: Parameter number, index, and drive object ID
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW
&2&RQQHFWRURXWSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH

%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
&,&RQQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN

%2
U

%,
S[[[[\


&2 ZLWKRXWLQGH[
U

&,
S[[[[\


&2 ZLWKLQGH[
,QGH[ >@ U
>@ U
>@ U
>@ U

Figure 5-3

&,
S[[[[\
>@

Interconnecting signals using BICO technology

Note
A signal source (BO) can be connected to any number of signal sinks (BI).
A signal sink (BI) can only be connected to one signal source (BO) at a time.
The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different command data sets
(CDS). The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

189

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.2 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals
Interconnections across drive objects are also possible.

Internal encoding of the binector/connector output parameters


The internal codes are needed, for example, in order to write BICO input parameters via
PROFIBUS.
'ULYH
REMHFW

3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU
%LW



 

,QGH[QXPEHU
 




'HYLFH HJ&8
2ZQREMHFW

([DPSOHVRIVLJQDOVRXUFHV

Figure 5-4

ELQ
GH]

ELQ
GH]

ELQ
GH]

()&KH[!&2>@

ELQ

ELQ

ELQ

KH[!)HVWH

ELQ

ELQ

ELQ

KH[!)HVWH

Internal encoding of the binector/connector output parameters

Sample interconnections
Example 1: Interconnection of digital signals
Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 1 on the Control Unit using
jog 1 and jog 2.
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH

%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN

9
;

',

;

',

;

',

;

',

S&
U
S&
U

9

Figure 5-5

U
U

-RJ
-RJ

,QWHUQDO

S&


-RJ

,QWHUQDO

S&


-RJ

Interconnection of digital signals

Example 2: Connection of OC/OFF3 to several drives


The OFF3 signal is to be connected to two drives via terminal DI 2 on the Control Unit.
Each drive has a binector input 1. OFF3 and 2. OFF3. The two signals are processed via an
AND gate to STW1.2 (OFF3).

190

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.2 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH

%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN
'ULYH

9
;

',

S&
U


S&


2))
2))

2))

'ULYH
S&

S&


Figure 5-6

5.2.3

2))
2))

2))

Connection of OFF3 to several drives (example)

Additional explanations of BICO technology

BICO interconnections to other drives


The following parameters are available for BICO interconnections to other drives:
r9490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives
r9491[0...15] BI/CI of BICO interconnections to other drives
r9492[0...15] BO/CO of BICO interconnections to other drives
p9493[0...15] Reset BICO interconnections to other drives

Copying drives
When a drive is copied, the interconnection is copied with it.

Binector-connector-converter
Several digital signals are converted to a 32-bit integer double word or to a 16-bit integer
word.
p2080[0...15] BI: PROFIdrive PZD send bit-wise

Connector-binector-converter
A 32-bit integer double word or a 16-bit integer word is converted to individual digital
signals.
p2099[0...1] CI: PROFIdrive PZD selection receive bit-wise

Fixed values for interconnection using BICO technology


The following connector outputs are available for interconnecting any fixed value settings:
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value_%_1

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

191

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.3 Data sets
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value_%_2
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value_M_1
Example:
These parameters can be used to interconnect the scaling factor for the main setpoint or to
interconnect an additional torque.

5.3

Data sets

CDS: Command Data Set


The BICO parameters (binector and connector inputs) are grouped together in a command
data set. These parameters are used to interconnect the signal sources of a drive.
By configuring several command data sets and switching between them, the drive can be
operated with different pre-configured signal sources.
A command data set contains the following (examples):
Binector inputs for control commands (digital signals)
ON/OFF, enable signals (p0844, etc.)
Jog (p1055, etc.)
Connector inputs for setpoints (analog signals)
Voltage setpoint for V/f control (p1330)
Torque limits and scaling factors (p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529)
A drive object can depending on the type manage up to 4 command data sets. The
number of command data sets is configured with p0170.
The following parameters are available for selecting command data sets and for displaying
currently selected command data sets - e.g. in the vector mode, the following parameters are
available:
Binector inputs p0810 to p0811 are used to select a command data set. They represent the
number of the command data set (0 to 3) in binary format (where p0811 is the most
significant bit).
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1
If a command data set that does not exist is selected, the current data set remains active.
The selected data set is displayed using parameter (r0836).

192

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.3 Data sets
&'6
S  

 
 

U 

U 

&'6VHOHFWHG


S  

 


S  

 

S  

 

&'6HIIHFWLYH

W
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
U 

U 

W

Figure 5-7

Switching the command data set (example)

DDS: Drive Data Set


A drive data set contains various adjustable parameters that are relevant with respect to
open and closed-loop drive control:
Numbers of the assigned motor and encoder data sets:
p0186: assigned motor data set (MDS)
p0187 to p0189: up to 3 assigned encoder data sets (EDS)
Various control parameters, e.g.:
Fixed speed setpoints (p1001 to p1015)
Speed limits min./max. (p1080, p1082)
Characteristic data of ramp-function generator (p1120 ff)
Characteristic data of controller (p1240 ff)
...
The parameters that are grouped together in the drive data set are identified in the List
Manual by "Data Set DDS" and are assigned an index [0..n].
More than one drive data set can be configured. You can switch easily between different
drive configurations (control type, motor, encoder) by selecting the corresponding drive data
set.
One drive object can manage up to 32 drive data sets. The number of drive data sets is
configured with p0180.
Binector inputs p0820 to p0824 are used to select a drive data set. They represent the
number of the drive data set (0 to 31) in binary format (where p0824 is the most significant
bit).
p0820 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
p0821 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1
p0822 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

193

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.3 Data sets
p0823 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3
p0824 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4

Boundary conditions and recommendations


Recommendation for the number of drive data sets for a drive
The number of drive data sets for a drive should correspond to the options for
changeover. The following must therefore apply:
p0180 (DDS) max. (p0120 (PDS), p0130 (MDS))
Max. number of DDS for one drive object = 32 DDS

MDS: Motor Data Set


A motor data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected motor for
the purpose of configuring the drive (see table 6-2). It also contains certain visualization
parameters with calculated data.
Adjustable parameters, e.g.:
Motor component number (p0131)
Motor type selection (p0300)
Rated motor data (p0304 ff)
...
Visualization parameters, e.g.:
Calculated rated data (p0330 ff)
...
The parameters that are grouped together in the motor data set are identified in the List
Manual by "Data Set DDS" and are assigned an index [0..n].
A separate motor data set is required for each motor that is controlled by the Control Unit via
a Motor Module. The motor data set is assigned to a drive data set via parameter p0186.
A motor data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover. The motor data set
changeover is, for example, used for:
Switching over different motors
Switching over different windings in a motor (e.g. star-delta changeover)
Adapting the motor data
If several motors are operated alternately on a Motor Module, a matching number of drive
data sets must be created. For further information about motor changeover, see the "Motor
changeover" section in the Function Manual.
One drive object can manage up to 16 motor data sets. The number of motor data sets in
p0130 must not exceed the number of drive data sets in p0180.
For the 611U interface mode (p2038 = 1), the drive data sets are divided into groups of eight
(1-8; 8-16;...). Within a group, the assignment to the motor data set must be identical:
p0186[0] = p0186[1] = ... = p0186[7]
p0186[8] = p0186[9] = ... = p0186[15]

194

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.3 Data sets
p0186[16] = p0186[17] = ... = p0186[23]
p0186[24] = p0186[25] = ... = p0186[31]
If this rule is not observed, alarm A07514 is output. If you need a precise representation of
the data set structure of the 611U, 32 drive data sets and 4 motor data sets must be
configured.

Examples for a data set assignment


Table 5-4

Example, data set assignment

DDS

Motor
(p0186)

Encoder 1
(p0187)

Encoder 2
(p0188)

Encoder 3
(p0189)

DDS 0

MDS 0

EDS 0

EDS 1

EDS 2

DDS 1

MDS 0

EDS 0

EDS 3

DDS 2

MDS 0

EDS 0

EDS 4

EDS 5

DDS 3

MDS 1

EDS 6

Copying a command data set


Set parameter p0809 as follows:
1. p0809[0] = Number of the command data set to be copied (source)
2. p0809[1] = Number of the command data to which the data is to be copied (target)
3. p0809[2] = 1
Start copying.
Copying is finished when p0809[2] = 0.
Note
In STARTER, you can copy the command data sets (Drive -> Configuration -> "Command
data sets" tab page).
You can select the displayed command data set in the relevant STARTER screens.

Copying a drive data set


Set parameter p0819 as follows:
1. p0819[0] = Number of the drive data set to be copied (source)
2. p0819[1] = Number of the drive data set to which the data is to be copied (target)
3. p0819[2] = 1
Start copying.
Copying is finished when p0819[2] = 0.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

195

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.3 Data sets

Note
In STARTER, you can copy the drive data sets (Drive -> Configuration -> "Drive data sets"
tab page).
You can select the displayed drive data set in the relevant STARTER screens.

Copying the motor data set


Set parameter p0139 as follows:
1. p0139[0] = Number of the motor data set that is to be copied (source)
2. p0139[1] = Number of the motor data set which should be copied into (target)
3. p0139[2] = 1
Start copying.
Copying has been completed, if p0139[2] = 0.
Note
In STARTER, you can set the drive data sets via the drive configuration.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


8560 Command Data Sets (CDS)
8565 Drive Data Sets (DDS)
8570 Encoder Data Sets (EDS)
8575 Motor Data Sets (MDS)

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 5-5

196

Overview of important parameters (data sets)

Parameters

Description

p0120

Power Module data sets (PDS) number

p0130

Motor data sets (MDS) number

p0139

Copy motor data set (MDS)

p0140

Encoder data sets (EDS) number

p0170

Command data set (CDS) number

p0180

Drive data set (DDS) number

p0186

Motor data sets (MDS) number

p0187

Encoder 1 encoder data set number

p0188

Encoder 2 encoder data set number

p0189

Encoder 3 encoder data set number

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.4 Changing over units
Parameters

5.4

Description

p0809

Copy command data set CDS

p0810

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0

p0811

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1

p0812

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 2

p0813

BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 3

p0819[0...2]

Copy drive data set DDS

p0820

BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0

p0821

BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1

p0822

BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2

p0823

BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3

p0824

BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4

Changing over units

Description
By changing over the units, parameters and process quantities for input and output can be
changed over to an appropriate system of units (US units or as per unit quantities (%)).
The following supplementary conditions apply when changing over units:
Parameters of the type plate of the drive converter or the motor rating plate can be
changed over between SI/US units; however, a per unit representation is not possible.
After changing over the units parameter, all parameters that are assigned to one of the
units group dependent on it, are all changed over to the new system of units.
A parameter is available to select technological units (p0595) to represent technological
quantities in the technology controller.
If the units are converted to per unit quantities and the reference quantity changed, the
percentage value entered in a parameter is not changed.
Example:
A fixed speed of 80% corresponds, for a reference speed of 1500 RPM, to a value of
1200 RPM.
If the reference speed is changed to 3000 RPM, then the value of 80% is kept and
now means 2400 RPM.

Restrictions
When a unit changeover occurs, rounding to the decimal places is carried out. This can
lead to the original value being changed by up to one decimal place.
If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also
adjusted to ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

197

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.4 Changing over units
If the reference values (p2000 to p2007) are changed offline in STARTER, it can lead to
boundary violations of the parameter values, which cause error messages during loading
to the drive.

Groups of units
Every parameter that can be changed over is assigned to a units group, that, depending on
the group, can be changed over within certain limits.
This assignment and the unit groups can be read for each parameter in the parameter list in
the List Manual.
The unit groups can be individually switched using 4 parameters (p0100, p0349, p0505 and
p0595).

Function in STARTER
To call up the function for converting units in STARTER, choose Drive object ->
Configuration -> Units. The reference parameters can be found under Drive object ->
Configuration -> Reference parameters

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 5-6

198

Overview of important parameters (switchover of units)

Parameter
s

Description

p0010

Commissioning parameter filter

p0100

IEC/NEMA motor standard

p0349

Selection of units system, motor equivalent circuit diagram data

p0505

Selection of units system

p0595

Selection of technological unit

p0596

Reference variable of technological unit

p2000

CO: Reference frequency/speed

p2001

CO: Reference voltage

p2002

CO: Reference current

p2003

CO: Reference torque

r2004

CO: Reference power

p2005

CO: Reference angle

p2007

CO: Reference acceleration

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.5 Reference parameters/normalizations

5.5

Reference parameters/normalizations

Description
Reference values, corresponding to 100%, are required for the statement of units as
percentages. These reference values are entered in parameters p2000 to p2007. They are
computed during the calculation through p0340 = 1 or in STARTER during drive
configuration. After calculation in the drive, these parameters are automatically protected via
p0573 = 1 from boundary violation through a new calculation (p0340). This eliminates the
need to adjust the references values in a PROFIdrive controller whenever a new calculation
of the reference parameters via p0340 takes place.
3HUFHQW

!SK\VLFDOXQLW
[

5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOHV
SU

[

3K\VLFDOXQLW

\
[

[ [



[

!SHUFHQW


\
[
[

>@

5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOHV
SU

Figure 5-8

Illustration of conversion with reference values

Note
If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also adjusted to
ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.

Using STARTER offline


Following offline drive configuration, the reference parameters are preset; they can be
changed and protected under Drive -> Configuration -> "Disabled list" tab.
Note
If the reference values (p2000 to p2007) are changed offline in STARTER, it can lead to
boundary violations of the parameter values, which cause error messages during loading to
the drive.

Scaling for vector object


Table 5-7

Scaling for vector object


Size

Reference speed

Scaling parameter
100 % = p2000

Default at initial commissioning


p2000 = synchronous rated speed
(p0310/r0313*60)

Reference voltage

100 % = p2001

p2001 = p2001=rated voltage (p0304)

Reference current

100 % = p2002

p2002 = p2002=rated current (p0305)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

199

Start

Parameter assignment / addressing


5.5 Reference parameters/normalizations
Size

Scaling parameter

Default at initial commissioning

Reference torque

100 % = p2003

p2003=rated torque (p0333)

Reference power

100 % = r2004

r2004 = p2003 * p2000 * 2 / 60

Reference angle

100% = p2005

90

Reference acceleration

100% = p2007

0.01 1/s2
1/s2

Reference frequency

100% = p2000/60

Reference modulation depth

100% = maximum output voltage


without overload (full block)

Reference flux

100 % = Rated motor flux

Reference temperature

100% = 100C

Reference electrical angle

100 % = 90

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 5-8

200

Overview of important parameters (refer to Reference parameters / Normalizations)

Parameter

Description

p0340

p0340 Automatic calculation of motor/control parameters

p0573

Disable automatic reference value calculation

p2000

Reference speed reference frequency

p2001

Reference voltage

p2002

Reference current

p2003

Reference torque

r2004

Reference power

p2005

Reference angle

p2007

Reference acceleration

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.1

Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)

6.1.1

Basic settings

Basic settings
0RWRU0RGXOH

&DEOH

)LOWHU
S

5 )LOWHU

S

/ )LOWHU
S
&

Figure 6-1

S>0@

5 &DEOH

S>0@

/ &DEOH

0RWRU
S>0@

S>0@

S>0@

/ 5

/ 6

56

S>0@

S>0@

55

)LOWHU

Equivalent circuit diagram, asynchronous motor with output filter and cable

Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If the
values for a delta connection are the only data available, all parameters must be divided by a
factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically.

Rating plate data


The rating plate data needs to be entered to complete the commissioning process.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

201

Start

Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Table 6-1

Motor data rating plate


Parameter

Description

p0300:

Motor type

p0304

Rated motor voltage

p0305

Rated motor current

p0307

Rated motor power

p0310

Rated motor frequency

p0311

Rated motor speed

p0335

Motor cooling type

Remarks
The number of pole pairs is calculated
automatically from P310 / P311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in
error message 7950 when
commissioning is completed. The
suspected incorrect parameter is
shown in the appendage. The error
could be due to:
P307 >= 17,321 * P304 * P305
No motor selected (P300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low (induction motor
only)
It is very important that the value
specified for the rated motor speed
P311 is right to assess the motor data.

Optional parameters and equivalent circuit diagram data (ECD)


The following parameters can be optionally entered:
Table 6-2

Optional motor data


Parameter

Description

p0322

Maximum motor speed

P0323

Maximum motor current

p0341

Motor moment of inertia

p0342

Moment of inertia ratio

p0352

Cable resistance

p0353

Line inductance

202

Remarks
If P322 is entered, the maximum speed
in P1082 cannot physically exceed
P322. Likewise, the current limit in
p640 cannot exceed P323 if p323 > 0.
These parameters are primarily
designed to protect the motor.
Parameters P341 and P342 are
required for acceleration precontrol and
for encoderless operation. If these
parameters are left blank then
estimated values are derived from
P341 on the basis of the rating plate
data.
The line parameters P352 and P353
are particularly important if there are
long supply cables between the
converter and the motor. They are
usually insignificant in relation to the
motor parameters if the cables are
short, however.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Table 6-3

Equivalent circuit diagram for motor data


Parameter

Description

p0350

Motor stator resistance, cold

p0354

Motor rotor resistance, cold

p0356

Motor stator inductance

p0358

Motor rotor leakage inductance

p0360

Motor magnetizing inductance

Remarks
Correct entry of the ECD data has a
beneficial influence on the control
characteristics. In particular, the speed
and torque can be estimated far more
accurately during encoderless
operation. If the main inductance P360
is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current P320 can be
entered instead. This also allows for
better estimation of the parameters.
The resulting magnetizing current,
calculated on the basis of the data
entered, is displayed in R331.

Output filter
If the output filter or the motor reactor options are selected then the following parameters are
required, or the drive will use the default values if a Siemens filter is used by selecting
P230=10,000. Filters or reactors made by other manufacturers need to be entered manually.
Table 6-4

Output filter
Parameter

Description

P230

Filter type

P233

Motor reactor

P234

Sinus filter capacity

P236

Sinus filter resistance

P237

Sinus filter/motor reactor rated current

Remarks
If several power units are connected in
parallel, then parameters P233-P237
must simply be entered (for each power
unit). The capacitors, reactors and
resistors can be connected in series or
in parallel in the drive.
If you are using a sinus filter, the
maximum output frequency is restricted
to 66 Hz due to the motor's selfexcitation. P322 is therefore set to 60 x
66 Hz / pole pair by default.

Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Table 6-5

Operating modes
Parameter

Description

P1300 = 0

Simple V/f control with linear


characteristic curve

P1300 = 2

Simple V/f control with quadratic


characteristic curve

P1300 = 18

Simple I/f control with linear


characteristic curve

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Remarks
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are service and
commissioning modes and not
intended for use in normal operation.
This is due to the fact that large motors
tend to vibrate if operated purely under
controlled conditions. The dynamics

203

Start

Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Parameter

Description

P1300 = 20

Closed-loop speed control without a


rotary encoder

P1300 = 21

Closed-loop speed control with a rotary


encoder

P1300 = 22

Torque control without a rotary encoder

P1300 = 23

Torque control with a rotary encoder

Remarks
are also very poor and there is a high
risk of stalling. Only modes 20 to 23
should therefore be used ordinarily.

Completing the commissioning


The data listed above must be entered for all motor data sets. Once you have finished, exit
commissioning mode by setting P3900=3. Any incorrect parameters may cause error
message 7950 to be displayed. If this happens, the drive remains in "Commissioning" mode
(P10=1).

6.1.2

Motor data identification

Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed

Identification process
Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:

204

r1912

Total stator resistance (with series reactor/line)

r1913:

Rotor time constant

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
r1915

Total stator inductance (with series reactor/line)

Once the measurements have been completed successfully (P1900=0) and if the values
displayed are plausible, the results can be transferred to the ECD data (p0316, p0350
p0360). To do this, set P1910=1.
In addition to the motor data, the non-linearity of the converter is also measured. This
involves the linearization parameter P6926 being optimized so that the low-frequency
current harmonics (6th harmonic) are minimized. The non-linearity is particularly evident
at low speeds, where it results in unsteady running. A good value for p6926 also
improves the precision and quality of encoderless control.
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.

6.1.3

Advanced settings

6.1.3.1

Field weakening starting point

Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.

Function diagram (see List Manual)


6723 Flux setpoint calculation (ASM, PEM, p0300 = 1, 2)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

205

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

6.1.3.2

Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator


Note
If an encoder is not being used, a certain starting or holding current must be configured
so that the motor does not start to drift when it is at a standstill (P1610). The current level
should be chosen such that it is slightly above the maximum static load current when the
motor is at a standstill. Dynamic torques when starting up or even static load torques at
low speeds can be ignored. As a result, a low current of about 10% (default) will generally
suffice.
Parameter P1610 has no effect when using a encoder. A sensible value should
nevertheless be entered to ensure that the switchover in the event of encoder faults when
not using a encoder proceeds smoothly.
The speed control gain chosen should not exceed 10, since only a filtered model speed is
available during encoderless operation.
If there is motion when the speed is set to zero (imbalance or drifting from the speed
setpoint) then the total moment of inertia in P341 / P342 should be reduced. Parameter
R345 (rated motor acceleration time), which is determined from the motor data and the
total inertia, gives an indication of the correct moment of inertia.
For further information about setting and optimizing the speed controller, please refer to
section "Functions / Drive functions" in chapter "Speed controller".

See also
Speed controller (Page 231)

6.2

Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous


motors

6.2.1

Safety information
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
As soon as the motor starts to rotate, a high voltage is generated.
Safely disconnect the motor. If this is not possible, the motor must be locked by a holding
brake, for example.

206

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

Note
If pulse inhibition of the converter occurs (fault or OFF2), synchronous motors can generate
high terminal voltages in the field weakening range, which could lead to overvoltage in the
DC link. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due
to overvoltage:
Restrict (p0643 = 0) maximum speed (p1082)
External voltage limiter or chopper or other measures appropriate to the application (e.g.
circuit breaker on the motor side).
CAUTION
Overvoltages can result in damage to the converter.
The converter's components are only designed for a specific voltage.
With p0643 = 1, it must be ensured that there is sufficiently high and suitable overvoltage
protection. If necessary, precautionary measures should be taken on the system side.

6.2.2

Basic settings

Basic settings
0RWRU0RGXOH

5HDFWRU
S

S

5 5HDFWRU / 5HDFWRU

Figure 6-2

&DEOH
S>0@

5 &DEOH

S>0@

/ &DEOH

0RWRU
S>0@

S>0@

56

/T

S>0@

/G

S>0@

N7

Equivalent Circuit Diagram, Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor with Output Reactor and Cable

Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

207

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

Type plate data


The rating plate data needs to be entered to complete the commissioning process.
Table 6-6

Motor data type plate


Parameters

Description

p0300:

Motor type

p0304

Rated motor voltage

p0305

Rated motor current

p0307

Rated motor power

p0310

Rated motor frequency

p0311

Rated motor speed

p0335

Motor cooling type

Remarks
The number of pole pairs is calculated
automatically from P310 / P311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in
error message 7950 when
commissioning is completed. The
suspected incorrect parameter is
shown in the appendage. The error
could be due to:
P307 >= 17,321 * P304 * P305
No motor selected (P300=0)

Optional parameters and equivalent circuit diagram data (ECD)


The following parameters can be optionally entered:
Table 6-7

Optional motor data


Parameters

Description

p0322

Maximum motor speed

P0323

Maximum motor current

p0341

Motor moment of inertia

p0342

Moment of inertia ratio

p0352

Cable resistance

p0353

Line inductance

Table 6-8

208

If P322 is entered, the maximum speed


in P1082 cannot physically exceed
P322. Likewise, the current limit in
p640 cannot exceed P323 if p323 > 0.
These parameters are primarily
designed to protect the motor.
Parameters P341 and P342 are
required for acceleration precontrol and
for encoderless operation. If these
parameters are left blank then
estimated values are derived from
P341 on the basis of the rating plate
data.
The line parameters P352 and P353
are particularly important if there are
long supply cables between the
converter and the motor. They are
usually insignificant in relation to the
motor parameters if the cables are
short, however.

Equivalent circuit diagram for motor data


Parameters

p0316

Remarks

Description
Motor torque constant

Remarks
Specifying the correct ECD data has a

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Parameters

Description

p0350

Motor stator resistance, cold

p0356

Motor stator inductance, q axis

p0357

Motor stator inductance, d axis

Remarks
positive effect on the closed-loop
control. In particular, stability and
torque precision are improved when
operating with no encoder.

Motor reactor
If the motor reactor option has been chosen, the following parameters must be entered. A
permanently-excited synchronous machine cannot be operated near a sinus filter.
Table 6-9

Motor reactor
Parameters

Description

P230

Filter type

P233

Motor reactor

P236

Sinus filter resistance

P237

Sinus filter/motor reactor rated current

Remarks
If several power units are connected in
parallel, then parameters P233-P237
must simply be entered (for each power
unit). The capacitors, reactors and
resistors can be connected in series or
in parallel in the drive.

Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Table 6-10

Operating modes
Parameters

Description

P1300 = 0

Simple V/f control with linear


characteristic curve

P1300 = 2

Simple V/f control with quadratic


characteristic curve

P1300 = 18

Simple I/f control with linear


characteristic curve

P1300 = 20

Closed-loop speed control without a


rotary transducer

P1300 = 21

Closed-loop speed control with a rotary


transducer

P1300 = 22

Torque control without a rotary


transducer

P1300 = 23

Torque control with a rotary transducer

Remarks
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are intended
primarily for commissioning purposes,
and are not really suitable for ordinary
operation. This is due to the fact that
large motors tend to vibrate if operated
purely under controlled conditions. The
dynamics are also very poor and there
is a high risk of stalling. Only modes 20
to 23 should therefore be used
ordinarily.

Completing the commissioning


The data listed above must be entered for all motor data sets. Once you have finished,
complete commissioning by setting P3900=3. Any incorrect parameters may cause error
message 7950 to be displayed. If this happens, the drive remains in "Commissioning" mode
(P10=1).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

209

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

6.2.3

Motor data identification

Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed

Identification process
Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:
r1912

Total stator resistance (with series reactor/line)

r1937

Torque constant

r1988

Motor stator inductance, q axis

r1989

Motor stator inductance, d axis

Once the measurements have been completed successfully (P1900=0) and if the values
displayed are plausible, the results can be transferred to the ECD data (p0316, p0350
p0360). To do this, set P1910=1.
In addition to the motor data, the non-linearity of the converter is also measured. This
involves the linearization parameter P6926 being optimized so that the low-frequency
current harmonics (6th harmonic) are minimized. The non-linearity is particularly evident
at low speeds, where it results in unsteady running. A good value for p6926 also
improves the precision and quality of encoderless control.
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.

210

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

6.2.4

Pole position identification

Description
Pole position identification uses a test signal to determine the position of the rotor. The
following parameters determine the type and duration of the test signal.
p1980

Pole position identification procedure

p1993

Test current

p1994

Identification period

p1995

Identification frequency

In principle, a distinction can be made between saturation-based and motion-based


procedures. Saturation-based procedures require no encoder and work even when the shaft
is fully braked. As a rule, they are therefore less accurate.
Note
At speeds > 5%, the PEM control corrects the initially estimated pole position. An more
imprecise pole position procedure therefore has no impact on the orientation

Saturation-based procedure
If the motor has different inductance distribution in the d and q axis the procedures
p1980 = 4: for Ld > Lq
p1980 = 5: for Ld < Lq
can be selected. A possible data sheet or the identification results shown in the "Pole
position identification" section provide more information about the distribution. To provide
positive pole position identification, the difference between the d and the q inductance should
be at least 5%. The test current for this procedure is comparatively low (p1993 = approx.
10% of rated motor current).
If Ld and Lq are approximately equal, the p1980 = 1 procedure should be chosen. This
procedure requires high current levels (p1993 = approx. 50-100% of rated motor current)
and causes correspondingly high levels of noise and movement.
Note
The low- and high-level signal response of the inductances can be different. Procedures 4
and 5, for example, can produce perfectly acceptable results with a low test current, even
when Ld and Lq are more or less identical in terms of the high-level signal response. It is
therefore vital that the procedures are tested in advance.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

211

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

Motion-based procedures
Procedure
p1980 = 10
does not need a encoder. It injects the test current entered in p1993 and performs an
electrical 360 movement within the time specified in p1994. The motor aligns itself and
follows the current phasor. The test current should be orientated towards the maximum
blocking torque so that blocked drives can also be aligned.
Procedure
p1980 = 11
requires a encoder. The motor oscillates slightly, and these movements are detected and
evaluated with the encoder signal.
Note
If the oscillations are not strong enough, because the encoder does not have the necessary
resolution, the amplitude of the test current must be increased (p1993) or the frequency
reduced (p1995). Although this procedure is extremely accurate, it is only of limited use in
the case of fully-braked drives. The amplitude of the test current may have to be set very
high.

Test mode
Test mode can be used to find the best procedure for a particular motor. If test mode is
active (P1983 = 1), a cyclic permanent identification using the selected procedure (P1980) is
carried out the next time a pulse is issued. The phase displacement (r1984) is cyclically
updated and should fluctuate by no more than +/- 30.
NOTICE
In test mode, the drive can move several pole pitches
The following parameters can be modified to improve reproducibility:
Test current p1993:
A high test current produces better results, especially with procedures1, 10 and 11. For
procedures 4 and 5, the current is not the decisive factor.
Identification period p1994:
A longer identification period will generally improve reproducibility for all procedures.
Procedure P1980 = 10 in particular requires an adequate amount of time to allow the
motor to align itself.
Identification frequency p1995:
As a rule, a higher frequency has a positive impact in procedures 1, 4 and 5. However,
the value cannot be increased indefinitely due to the limited switching frequency of the
converter.
If procedure 11 is selected, the test frequency may have to be reduced to ensure
sufficient movement can be sensed by the encoder.

212

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors

Operating modes
In situations where a encoder is not being used, the pole position is identified each time a
pulse is issued, as the positional information is usually lost when the pulse is blocked.
If a encoder is being used, the response can be selected using P1982:
p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined
before a pulse is issued for the first time following encoder errors
before a pulse is issued for the first time after switching to a new operating mode
(p1300).
p1982 = 2: The pole position is determined each time before a pulse is issued.
p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined:
Following every complete or partial CU module boot

6.2.5

Advanced settings

6.2.5.1

Field weakening starting point

Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.

Function diagram (see List Manual)


6723 Flux setpoint calculation (ASM, PEM, p0300 = 1, 2)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

213

Start

Functions
6.3 Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors

6.2.5.2

Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator


Note
If an encoder is not being used, a certain starting or holding current must be configured
so that the motor does not start to drift when it is at a standstill (P1610). The current level
should be chosen such that it is slightly above the maximum static load current when the
motor is at a standstill. Dynamic torques when starting up or even static load torques at
low speeds can be ignored. As a result, a low current of about 10% (default) will generally
suffice.
Parameter P1610 has no effect when using a encoder. A sensible value should
nevertheless be entered to ensure that the switchover in the event of encoder faults when
not using a encoder proceeds smoothly.
The speed control gain chosen should not exceed 10, since only a filtered model speed is
available during encoderless operation.
If there is motion when the speed is set to zero (imbalance or drifting from the speed
setpoint) then the total moment of inertia in P341 / P342 should be reduced. Parameter
R345 (rated motor acceleration time), which is determined from the motor data and the
total inertia, gives an indication of the correct moment of inertia.
For further information about setting and optimizing the speed controller, please refer to
section "Functions / Drive functions" in chapter "Speed controller".

See also
Speed controller (Page 231)

6.3

Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous


motors
The commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors may only be performed by
engineers who have been trained by Siemens.

6.4

Drive Functions

6.4.1

Setpoint channel

6.4.1.1

Description
In the extended setpoint channel, setpoints from the setpoint source are conditioned for
motor control.

214

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
The setpoint for motor control can also originate from the technology controller (see
"Technology controller").
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU

$QDORJ
LQSXWV

)L[HG
VSHHGVHWSRLQWV

)LHOGEXV

-RJ

6XSSOHPHQWDU\
VHWSRLQW

0DLQVHWSRLQW

0DLQVXSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
GLUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ

5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

0RWRUFRQWURO
6HUYRYHFWRU

0RWRUFRQWURO

Figure 6-3

Extended setpoint channel

Properties of the extended setpoint channel


Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling
Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover
Suppression bandwidths and setpoint limitation
Ramp function generator

Setpoint sources
The closed-loop control setpoint can be interconnected from various sources using BICO
technology (e.g. to p1070 CI: main setpoint (see function diagram 3030)).
There are various options for setpoint input:
Fixed speed setpoints
Motorized potentiometer
Jog
Field bus
Setpoint via PROFIBUS, for example
Via the analog inputs of the following exemplary components:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

215

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
e.g. Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
e.g. Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
e.g. Terminal Module 41 (TM41)

6.4.1.2

Jog

Description
This function can be selected via digital inputs or via a field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS). The
setpoint is, therefore, predefined via p1058[D] and p1059[D].
When a jog signal is present, the motor is accelerated to the jog setpoint with the
acceleration ramp of the ramp function generator (referred to the maximum speed p1082;
see diagram "Function chart: jog 1 and jog 2"). After the jog signal has been deselected, the
motor is decelerated via the set ramp of the ramp function generator.
CAUTION
The jog function is not PROFIdrive compatible!

6LJQDO
-RJ
6LJQDO
212))
(IIHFWLYH
WRWDOVHWSRLQW U
-RJVHWSRLQW
(IIHFWLYH

Figure 6-4

216

Function chart: jog and OFF1

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions



-RJ
S


'LJLWDOLQSXW

W




)LHOGEXV

-RJ
S


W


Q

S
S

Figure 6-5

S

S

S

S
S

S

W

Function chart: jog 1 and jog 2

Jog properties
If both jog signals are issued at the same time, the current speed is maintained (constant
velocity phase).
Jog setpoints are approached and exited via the ramp function generator.
The jog function can be activated from the "ready to start" status and from the OFF1
deceleration ramp.
If ON/OFF1 = "1" and jog are selected simultaneously, ON/OFF1 has priority.
OFF2 and OFF3 have priority over jogging.
In jog mode, the main speed setpoints (r1078) and the supplementary setpoints 1 and 2
(p1155 and p1160) are inhibited.
The suppression bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094) and the minimum limit (p1080) in the
setpoint channel are also active in jog mode.
In jog mode, ZSWA.02 (operation enabled) is set to "0" because the speed setpoint has
not been enabled for control.
The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

217

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Jog sequence
32:(521
63RZHURQGLVDEOH
=6:$( 
=6:$( 

!

&RPPLVVLRQLQJILQLVKHG
S DQGS 
 $86 67:$( 
 $86 67:$( 

[
!

!

9RQ(3WHUPLQDOV
SRZHUXQLW

65HDG\WRSRZHUXS
!

=6:$ 
=6:$ 


!

'ULYHDWVWDQGVWLOO

0DLQFRQWDFWRURII
:DLWIRUMRJ

-RJ
67:$ !

+:SXOVHHQDEOH
>)3@



-RJ
67:$ !

6F-RJ
GHFHOHUDWLRQUDPS

65HDG\WRUXQ
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ 67:$

=6:$ 
! =6:$ 
=6:$ 

!
5XQGRZQGULYHXVLQJUDPS
IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRUXQWLO
_Q_QBPLQS VSHHG
WKUHVKROGVWDQGVWLOO
PRQLWRULQJ


!

/LQHFRQWDFWRU2Q
:DLWIRUSUHFKDUJH

!
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ 67:$
5HDG\IURP0RWRU0RGXOH U
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQFRPSOHWH
U  
,QIHHGUHDG\
S 

-RJ
-RJ

-RJ



-RJ

62SHUDWLRQ
!

=6:$ 
=6:$ 
=6:$ 


!

SXOVHVHQDEOHG
FRQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
HQDEOHDVVRFLDWHGMRJVHWSRLQW

!67:$[[ 6HTXHQFHFRQWUROZRUGELW[[ U 


=6:$[[ 6HTXHQFHFRQWUROVWDWXVZRUGELW[[ U 
!U SRZHUODPS

Figure 6-6

Jog sequence

Control and status messages


Table 6-11

Jog control

Signal name

Internal control word

Binector input

PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116

0 = OFF1

STWA.0

p0840 ON/OFF1

STW1.0

218

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Signal name

Internal control word

Binector input

PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116

0 = OFF2

STWA.1

p0844 1. OFF2
p0845 2. OFF2

STW1.1

0 = OFF3

STWA.2

p0848 1. OFF3
p0849 2. OFF3

STW1.2

Enable operation

STWA.3

p0852 Enable operation

STW1.3

Jog 1

STWA.8

p1055 Jog bit 0

STW1.8

Jog 2

STWA.9

p1056 Jog bit 1

STW1.9

Table 6-12

Jog status message

Signal name

Internal status word

Parameters

PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116

Ready to power up

ZSWA.0

r0899.0

ZSW1.0

Ready to run

ZSWA.1

r0899.1

ZSW1.1

Operation enabled

ZSWA.2

r0899.2

ZSW1.2

Power-on disable

ZSWA.6

r0899.6

ZSW1.6

Pulses enabled

ZSWA.11

r0899.11

ZSW1.11

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


2610 Execution control - processor
3030 Main/added setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-13

Overview of important parameters (jog setpoint channel)

Parameters

Description

p1055[CDS]

BI: Jog bit 0

p1056[CDS]

BI: Jog bit 1

p1058[DDS]

Jog 1 speed setpoint

p1059[DDS]

Jog 2 speed setpoint

p1082[DDS]

Maximum speed

p1120[DDS]

Ramp function generator ramp-up time

p1121[DDS]

Ramp function generator ramp-down time

Parameterization with STARTER


The "Speed setpoint jog" parameter screen is selected with the
STARTER commissioning tool:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

icon in the toolbar of the

219

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.1.3

Fixed speed setpoints

Description
This function can be used to specify preset speed setpoints. The fixed setpoints are defined
in parameters and selected via binector inputs. Both the individual fixed setpoints and the
effective fixed setpoint are available for further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. to
connector input p1070 - CI: main setpoint).

Properties
Number of fixed setpoints: Fixed setpoint 1 to 15
Selection of fixed setpoints: Binector input bits 0 to 3
Binector input bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 = 0 -> setpoint = 0 active
Unused binector inputs have the same effect as a "0" signal

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Overviews - setpoint channel
2503 Execution control status word
3010 Fixed speed setpoints

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-14

Overview of important parameters (fixed speed setpoints)

Parameters

Description

Adjustable parameters
p1001[D] ... p1015[D]

CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 ... CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15

p1020[C]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0

p1021[C]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1

p1022[C]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2

p1023[C]

BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3

Display parameters
r1024

CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective

r1197

Current fixed speed setpoint number

Parameterization with STARTER


In the STARTER commissioning tool, the "Fixed setpoints" parameter screen in the project
navigator under the relevant drive is activated by double-clicking Setpoint channel -> Fixed
setpoints.

220

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.1.4

Motorized potentiometer

Description
This function is used to simulate an electromechanical potentiometer for setpoint input.
You can switch between manual and automatic mode for setpoint input. The specified
setpoint is routed to an internal ramp function generator. Setting values, start values and
braking with OFF1 do not require the ramp function generator of the motorized
potentiometer.
The output of the ramp function generator for the motorized potentiometer is available for
further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. interconnection to connector input p1070
- CI: main setpoint, an additional ramp function generator is then active).

Properties for manual mode (p1041 = "0")


Separate binector inputs for Raise and Lower are used to adjust the input setpoint:
p1035 BI: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
p1036 BI: Motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint
Invert setpoint (p1039)
Configurable ramp function generator, e.g.:
Ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1047/p1048) referred to p1082
Setting value (p1043/p1044)
Initial rounding-off active/not active (p1030.2)
Non-volatile storage via p1030.3
Configurable setpoint for Power On (p1030.0)
Starting value is the value in p1040 (p1030.0 = 0)
Starting value is the stored value (p1030.0 = 1)

Properties for automatic mode (p1041 = "1")


The input setpoint is specified via a connector input (p1042).
The motorized potentiometer acts like a "normal" ramp function generator.
Configurable ramp function generator, e.g.:
Switch on/off (p1030.1)
Ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1047/p1048)
Setting value (p1043/p1044)
Initial rounding-off active/not active (p1030.2)
Non-volatile storage of the setpoints via p1030.3
Configurable setpoint for Power On (p1030.0)
Starting value is the value in p1040 (p1030.0 = 0)
Starting value is the stored value (p1030.0 = 1)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

221

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Setpoint channel
2501 Control word sequential control
3020 Motorized potentiometer

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-15

Overview of important parameters (motorized potentiometer)

Parameters

Description

p1030[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer, configuration

p1035[CDS]

BI: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise

p1036[CDS]

BI: Motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint

p1037[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed

p1038[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed

p1039[CDS]

BI: Motorized potentiometer, inversion

p1040[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer start value

p1041[CDS]

BI: Motorized potentiometer, manual/automatic

p1042[CDS]

CI: Motorized potentiometer, automatic setpoint

p1043[CDS]

BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setpoint

p1044[CDS]

CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value

r1045

CO: Motorized potentiometer, speed setpoint in front of the ramp function generator

p1047[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time

p1048[DDS]

Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time

r1050 CO:

Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp function generator

p1082[DDS]

Maximum speed

Parameterization with STARTER


In the STARTER commissioning tool, the "Motorized potentiometer" parameter screen in the
project navigator under the relevant drive is activated by double-clicking Setpoint channel ->
Motorized potentiometer.

6.4.1.5

Main/supplementary setpoint and setpoint modification

Description
The supplementary setpoint can be used to incorporate correction values from lower-level
controllers. This can be easily carried out using the addition point for the
main/supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel. Both variables are imported
simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel.

222

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0DLQVHWSRLQW
VFDOLQJ
S>&@


0DLQVHWSRLQW

U

S>&@


6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW

U

S>&@


U

6XSSOHPHQWDU\
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
S>&@

'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQUHYHUVDO

6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
6HWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO

Figure 6-7

Setpoint addition, setpoint scaling

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Setpoint channel
3030 Main/added setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-16
Parameters

Overview of important parameters (main and supplementary setpoint)


Description

Adjustable parameters
p1020[C]

CI: Main setpoint

p1071[C] CI:

Main setpoint scaling

p1075[C]

CI: Supplementary setpoint

p1076[C]

CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling

Display parameters
r1073[C]

CO: Main setpoint effective

r1077[C]

CO: Supplementary setpoint effective

r1078[C]

CO: Total setpoint effective

Parameterization with STARTER


The "Speed setpoint" parameter screen is selected with the
STARTER commissioning tool:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

icon in the toolbar of the

223

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.1.6

Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover

Description
A reverse operation involves a direction reversal. A direction reversal in the setpoint channel
can be triggered by selecting direction reversal p1113[CDS].
If, on the other hand, a negative or positive setpoint is not to be preselected via the setpoint
channel, this can be prevented via parameter p1110[CDS or p1111[CDS]. However, the
following settings for minimum speed (p1080) in the setpoint channel are still operative. With
the minimum speed, the motor can turn in a negative direction, although p1110 = 1 is set.
 'HDFWLYDWHSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
 'HDFWLYDWHQHJDWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
 'LUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
S>&@















6NLSIUHTXHQF\EDQGV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQV
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

0RWRUFRQWURO

Figure 6-8

Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Setpoint channel
3040 Direction limitation and direction reversal

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-17

224

Overview of important parameters (direction of rotation)

Parameters

Description

p1110[CDS]

BI: Inhibit negative direction

p1111[CDS]

BI: Inhibit positive direction

p1113[CDS

] BI: Direction reversal

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Parameterization with STARTER


The "Speed setpoint" parameter screen is selected with the
STARTER commissioning tool:

6.4.1.7

icon in the toolbar of the

Suppression bandwidths and setpoint limits

Description
In the range 0 U/min to setpoint speed, a drive train (e.g. motor, coupling, shaft, machine)
can have one or more points of resonance, which can result in vibrations. The suppression
bandwidths can be used to prevent operation in the resonance frequency range.
The limit frequencies can be set via p1080[DDS] and p1082[DDS]. These limits can be
changed during operation with the connectors p1085[CDS] and p1088[CDS].
S>'@



S>'@

6XSSUHVVLRQ
EDQGZLGWKV
S>'@
S>'@
S

S>&@
 

0LQ

U

S>'@

0LQVSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ
S>'@

0D[VSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ

\

\

[


\
[

U

[ \

U


S'@
S

S>&@
 

0D[

U

5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

0RWRUFRQWURO

Figure 6-9

Suppression bandwidths, setpoint limitation

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Setpoint channel
3050 Suppression bandwidth and speed limiting

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

225

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-18

Overview of most important parameters (suppression bandwidths and setpoint limitation)

Parameters

Description

Setpoint limitation
p1080[D]

Minimum speed

p1082[D]

Maximum speed

p1083[D]

CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation

r1084

Speed limit positive effective

p1085[C]

CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation

p1086[D]

CO: Speed limit negative direction of rotation

r1087

Speed limit negative effective

p1088[C] DI:

Speed limit negative direction of rotation

r1119

Ramp function generator setpoint at the input

Suppression bandwidths
p1091[D] ... p1094[D]

Suppression speed 1 to suppression speed 4

p1101[D]

Suppression speed bandwidth

Parameterization with STARTER


The "Speed limitation" parameter screen is selected with the
STARTER commissioning tool.

6.4.1.8

icon in the toolbar of the

Ramp function generator

Description
The ramp function generator is used to limit acceleration in the event of abrupt setpoint
changes, which helps prevent load surges throughout the drive train. The ramp-up time
p1120[DDS] and ramp-down time p1121[DDS] can be used to set an acceleration ramp and
a deceleration ramp independently of each other. This allows a controlled transition to be
made in the event of setpoint changes.
The maximum speed p1082[DDS] is used as a reference value for calculating the ramps
from the ramp-up and ramp-down times. A special adjustable ramp can be set via p1135 for
fast stop (OFF3), e.g. for rapid controlled deceleration when an emergency stop button is
pressed.
There are two types of ramp function generator:
Simple ramp function generator with
Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Ramp for fast stop (OFF3)
Tracking can be selected via a binector input

226

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Setting values for the ramp function generator
Extended ramp function generator also has
Initial and final rounding off
Note
The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).

Properties of the simple ramp function generator


[

7XS

7GQ

S
W
S
\
S
W
S
7XS

Figure 6-10

7GQ

Ramp-up and ramp-down with the simple ramp function generator

RFG ramp-up time Tup p1120[DDS]


RFG ramp-down time Tdn p1121[DDS]
OFF3 deceleration ramp
OFF3 ramp-down time p1135[DDS]
Set ramp function generator
Ramp function generator setting value p1144[CDS]
Set ramp function generator signal p1143[CDS]
Freezing of the ramp function generator using p1141 (not in jog mode r0046.31 = 0)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

227

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Properties of the extended ramp function generator


7XS

\
S

7GQ

[
\

S
G\GW ,5

)5

,5

)5 ,5

)5

,5

)5

W

7XSBHII

Figure 6-11

7GQBHII

Extended ramp function generator

RFG ramp-up time Tup p1120[DDS]


RFG ramp-down time Tdn p1121[DDS]
Initial rounding-off time IR p1130[DDS]
Final rounding-off time FR p1131[DDS]
Rounding-off typep1134[DDS]
Effective ramp-up time
Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2)
Effective ramp-down time
Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2)
OFF3 deceleration ramp
OFF3 ramp-down time p1135[DDS]
OFF3 initial rounding p1136[DDS]
OFF3 end rounding p1137[DDS]
Set ramp function generator
Ramp function generator setting value p1144[CDS]
Set ramp function generator signal p1143[CDS]
Ramp function generator rounding-off type p1134[DDS]
p1134 = "0": continuous smoothing rounding is always active. Overshoots may occur.
If the setpoint changes, final rounding is carried out and then the direction of the new
setpoint is adopted.
p1134 = "1": non-continuous smoothing changes immediately to the direction of the
new setpoint when the setpoint is changed.
Ramp function generator configuration, deactivate rounding in zero transition p1151[DDS]
Freezing of the ramp function generator using p1141 (not in jog mode r0046.31 = 0)

228

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Ramp function generator tracking


If the drive is in the area of the torque limits, the actual speed value is removed from the
speed setpoint. The ramp function generator tracking updates the speed setpoint in line with
the actual speed value and so levels the ramp. p1145 can be used to deactivate ramp
function generator tracking (p1145 = 0) or set the permissible following error (p1145 > 1). If
the permissible following error is reached, then the speed setpoint at the ramp function
generator output will only be further increased in proportion to the speed setpoint.
Ramp function generator tracking can be activated for the simple and the extended ramp
function generators.
ZLWKRXWWUDFNLQJ

ZLWKWUDFNLQJ

6SHHGVHWSRLQW

2XWSXWRI
UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

6SHHGVHWSRLQW

2XWSXWRI
UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

S

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
W

Figure 6-12

W

W W

Ramp function generator tracking

Without ramp function generator tracking


p1145 = 0
Drive accelerates until t2 although setpoint < actual value

With ramp function generator tracking


At p1145 > 1 (values between 0 and 1 are not applicable), ramp function generator
tracking is activated when the torque limit is approached. The ramp function generator
output thereby only exceeds the actual speed value by a deviation value that can be
defined in p1145.
t1 and t2 almost identical

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


1550 Setpoint channel
3060 Simple ramp function generator
3070 Extended ramp function generator
3080 Ramp function generator selection, status word, tracking

Signal overview (see List Manual)


Control signal STW1.2 OFF3

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

229

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Control signal STW1.4 Enable ramp function generator
Control signal STW1.5 Start/stop ramp function generator
Control signal STW1.6 Enable setpoint
Control signal STW2.1 Bypass ramp function generator

Parameterization with STARTER


The "Ramp function generator" parameter screen is selected with the
of the STARTER commissioning tool.

icon in the toolbar

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-19
Parameters

Overview of important parameters (ramp function generator)


Description

Adjustable parameters
p1115

Ramp function generator selection

p1120[DDS]

Ramp function generator ramp-up time

p1121[DDS]

Ramp function generator ramp-down time

p1122[CDS]

BI: Bypass ramp function generator

p1130[DDS]

Ramp function generator initial rounding time

p1131[DDS]

Ramp function generator final rounding time

p1134[DDS]

Ramp function generator rounding type

p1135[DDS]

OFF3 ramp-down time

p1136[DDS]

OFF3 initial rounding time

p1137[DDS]

OFF3 final rounding time

p1140[CDS]

BI: Enable ramp generator

p1141[CDS]

BI: Start ramp function generator

p1143[CDS]

BI: Ramp function generator, accept setting value

p1144[CDS]

CI: Ramp function generator setting value

p1145[DDS]

Ramp function generator tracking

p1148 [DDS]

Ramp function generator tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active

p1151 [DDS]

Ramp function generator configuration

Display parameters

230

r1119

CO: Ramp function generator setpoint at the input

p1149

Ramp function generator acceleration

r1150

CO: Ramp function generator speed setpoint at the output

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.2

Speed controller

6.4.2.1

Description
Both closed-loop control procedures with and without a sensor (VC, SLVC) have the same
speed controller structure, which contains the following components:
PI controller
Speed controller pre-control
Droop function
The total of the output variables result in the torque setpoint, which is reduced to the
permissible magnitude by means of the torque setpoint limitation.

Speed controller
The speed controller receives its setpoint (r0062) from the setpoint channel and its actual
value (r0063) either directly from the speed sensor (control with sensor (VC)) or indirectly via
the motor model (control without sensor (SLVC)). The system deviation is increased by the
PI controller and, in conjunction with the pre-control, results in the torque setpoint.
When the load torque increases, the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when droop
is active, which means that the single drive within a group (two or more mechanically
connected motors) is relieved when the torque becomes too great.
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ

U
U

3UH
FRQWURO
.S

6SHHG
FRQWURO
U

U


6SHHGVHWSRLQW


U

7Q

3,
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU

U>@

U

U
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW

7L
U>@

U

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROKDVEHHQDFWLYDWHG
S!

Figure 6-13

6/9&

7L
S

.S
S

7Q
S

9&

S

S

S

Speed controller

The controller parameter default settings are as follows:


Tn = 1000 ms
Kp = 4 (p.u. value)
If vibrations occur with these settings, the speed controller gain Kp must be reduced
manually. Actual-speed-value smoothing can also be increased (standard procedure for
gearless or high-frequency torsion vibrations) and the controller calculation performed again
because this value is also used to calculate Kp and Tn.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

231

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
The following relationships apply for optimization:
If Kp is increased, the controller becomes faster, although overshoot is reduced. Signal
ripples and vibrations in the speed control loop, however, increase.
If Tn is decreased, the controller still becomes faster, although overshoot is increased.
When speed control is set manually, it is easiest to define the possible dynamic response via
Kp (and actual speed value smoothing) first before reducing the integral time as much as
possible. When doing so, closed-loop control must also remain stable in the field-weakening
range.
To suppress any vibrations that occur in the speed controller, it is usually only necessary to
increase the smoothing time in p1452 for operation with a sensor or p1442 for operation
without a sensor or reduce the controller gain.
The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored via r1482 and the limited
controller output via r1508 (torque setpoint).
Note
In comparison with speed control with a sensor, the dynamic response of drives without a
sensor is significantly reduced. The actual speed is derived by means of a model calculation
from the converter output variables for current and voltage that have a corresponding
interference level. To this end, the actual speed must be adjusted by means of filter
algorithms in the software.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6040 Speed controller with/without sensor

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-20

232

Overview of important parameters (speed controller)

Parameter

Description

p0340[0...n]

Automatic calculation, control parameters

p1442[0...n]

Speed actual value smoothing time

p1452[0...n]

Speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC)

p1460[0...n]

Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower

p1462[0...n]

Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower

p1470[0...n]

Speed controller sensorless operation P gain

p1472[0...n]

Speed controller sensorless operation integral time

p1960

Speed controller optimization selection

r0062

CO: Speed setpoint after the filter

r0063[0...1]

CO: Speed actual value

r0345[0...n]

Rated motor start-up time

r1482

CO: Speed controller I torque output

r1508 CO

Torque setpoint before supplementary torque

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.2.2

Speed controller adaptation

Description
Two adaptation methods are available, namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed-dependent
Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation.
Free Kp_n adaptation can also also be activated in "operation without sensor" mode and is
used in "operation with sensor" mode as an additional factor for speed-dependent Kp_n
adaptation.
The speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n-adaptation is only active during "operation with sensor".
S

S

 

$GDSWDWLRQVLJQDO
S


[


UHIHUUHGWR
S[RUS[

$GDSWDWLRQVLJQDO
S


S

S

S
S


S 

.SBQBDGDSW

6SHHGGHSHQGHQW

S

.SBQDGDSWDWLRQ

S

S
6HQVRUOHVV
YHFWRU
FRQWURO
DFWLYH

S

'\QDPLFUHGXFWLRQ

 

)LHOGZHDNHQLQJ
S

RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI

WR
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU

VHQVRUOHVV
S

YHFWRUFRQWURO
S

S 
S


6SHHGGHSHQGHQW

7QBQDGDSWDWLRQ


Figure 6-14

7QBQBDGDSW

Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation

Dynamic response reduction in the field-weakening range can be activated (p1400.0) with
sensorless operation. This is activated when the speed controller is optimized in order to
achieve a greater dynamic response in the basic speed range.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

233

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Example of speed-dependent adaptation


Note
This type of adaptation is only active in "operation with sensor" mode.

.SBQ
7QBQ

3URSRUWLRQDOJDLQ
,QWHJUDODFWLRQWLPH
S[S
S

.SBQ

ZLWKDGDSWDWLRQ
S[S




S

7QBQ

ZLWKRXWDGDSWDWLRQ


Q

S

S



&RQVWDQWORZHUVSHHGUDQJH

QS



$GDSWDWLRQUDQJH

SQS



&RQVWDQWXSSHUVSHHGUDQJH

Q!S

Figure 6-15

Speed controller Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

Parameterization
In the STARTER commissioning tool, the "Speed controller" parameter screen is selected
with the
icon in the toolbar:

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6050 Kp_n and Tn_n adaptation

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-21

Overview of important parameters (speed controller adaptation)

Parameter
s

Description

p1400.5

Speed control configuration: Kp/Tn adaptation active

p1470

Speed controller sensorless operation P-gain

p1472

Speed controller sensorless operation integral action time

Free Kp_n adaptation


p1455

234

CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter
s

Description

p1456

Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point

p1457

Speed amplifier P gain adaptation upper starting point

p1458

Adaptation factor lower

p1459

Adaptation factor upper

p1466

CI: Speed controller P gain scaling

Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (VC only)


p1460

Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower

p1461

Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, upper

p1462

Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower

p1463

Speed controller integral time adaptation speed, upper

p1464

Speed controller adaptation speed, lower

p1465

Speed controller adaptation speed, upper

Dynamic response reduction field weakening (SLVC only)


p1400.0

6.4.2.3

Speed control configuration: Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active

Speed controller pre-control and reference model


The command behavior of the speed control loop can be improved by calculating the
accelerating torque from the speed setpoint and connecting it on the line side of the speed
controller. This torque setpoint (mv) is calculated from

 S-
PY

GQ
GQ
SSS
GW
GW

The torque setpoint is switched/pre-controlled directly to the current controller via adaptors
as supplementary command variables (enabled via p1496).
The motor moment of inertia p0341 is calculated directly during commissioning or when the
entire set of parameters is calculated (p0340 = 1). The factor p0342 between the total
moment of inertia J and the motor moment of inertia must be determined manually or by
means of speed controller optimization. The acceleration is calculated from the speed
difference over the time dn/dt.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

235

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
$FFHOHUDWLRQSUHFRQWURO


S
S

S S

U
U




.S

S
S S

U


!

6SHHGVHWSRLQW

3,
6SHHG U>@
FRQWUROOHU

7L

U>@

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
 RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS 
 RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS 

Figure 6-16

7Q

7L

U

U

U

7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW

7L

.S

7Q

6/9&

S

S

S

9&

S

S

S

Speed controller with pre-control

If the speed controller has been correctly adjusted, it only has to compensate for disturbance
variables in its own control loop, which can be achieved by means of a relatively small
change to the correcting variables. Speed setpoint changes, on the other hand, are carried
out without involving the speed controller and are, therefore, performed more quickly.
The effect of the pre-control variable can be adapted according to the application via the
evaluation factor p1496. If p1496 = 100 %, pre-control is calculated in accordance with the
motor and load moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). A balancing filter is used automatically to
prevent the speed controller from acting against the injected torque setpoint. The time
constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control
loop. Speed controller pre-control is correctly set (p1496 = 100%, calibration via p0342)
when the I component of the speed controller (r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or
ramp-down in the range n > 20% x p0310. Thus, the pre-control allows a new speed setpoint
to be approached without overshoot (prerequisite: the torque limiting does not act and the
moment of inertia remains constant).
If the speed controller is pre-controlled through injection, the speed setpoint (r0062) is
delayed with the same smoothing time (p1442 or p1452) as the actual value (r1445). This
ensures that no target/actual difference (r0064) occurs at the controller input during
acceleration, which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time.
When speed pre-control is activated, the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or
without a higher interference level (avoids sudden torque changes). An appropriate signal
can be generated by smoothing the speed setpoint or activating the ramp function generator
rounding p1130 p1131.
The starting time r0345 (Tstart) is a measure for the total moment of inertia J of the machine
and describes the time during which the unloaded drive can be accelerated with the rated
motor torque r0333 (Mmot,rated) from standstill to the rated motor speed p0311 (nmot,rated).

U

7$QODXI -




Q0RWQHQQ
00RWQHQQ

S S




S
U

If these basic conditions are in line with the application, the starting time can be used as the
lowest value for the ramp-up or ramp-down time.

236

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Note
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120; p1121) of the ramp function generator in the
setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint
during acceleration and braking. This ensures that speed controller pre-control is functioning
optimally.
The acceleration pre-control using a connector input (p1495) is activated by the parameter
settings p1400.2 = 1 and p1400.3 = 0. p1428 (dead time) and p1429 (time constant) can be
set for balancing purposes.

Reference model
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
5HIHUHQFHPRGHOVSHHGFRQWURO
S

S

U

S

.S

7Q
U

U

S





U>@

U

U>@

7L

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
7L

U

7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW



6SHHG
VHWSRLQW

Figure 6-17

3,
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU

U

.S

7Q

6/9&

S

S

S

9&

S

S

S

Reference model

The reference model is activated when p1400.3 = 1 and p1400.2 = 0.


The reference model is used to emulate the path of the speed control loop with a P speed
controller.
The path emulation can be set in p1433 to p1435. It is activated when p1437 is connected to
the output of model r1436.
The reference model delays the setpoint-actual deviation for the integral component of the
speed controller so that transient conditions can be suppressed.
The reference model can also be emulated externally and its output signal injected via
p1437.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

237

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6031 Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model
6040 Speed controller

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-22

Overview of important parameters (speed controller pre-control)

Parameters

Description

p0311[0...n]

Rated motor speed

r0333[0...n]

Rated motor torque

p0341[0...n]

Motor moment of inertia

p0342[0...n]

Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia

r0345[0...n]

Rated motor start-up time

p1400.2[0...n]

Acceleration pre-control source

p1428[0...n]

Speed pre-control balancing dead time

p1429[0...n]

Speed pre-control balancing time constant

p1496[0...n]

Acceleration pre-control scaling

r1518

CO: Accelerating torque

For reference model

6.4.2.4

p1400.3[0...n]

Reference model speed setpoint I component

p1433[0...n]

Speed controller reference model natural frequency

p1434[0...n]

Speed controller reference model damping

p1435[0...n]

Speed controller reference model dead time

r1436

CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output

p1437[0...n]

CI: Speed controller reference model I component input

Droop function

Description
Droop (enabled via p1492) ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally as the
load torque increases.

238

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

S

'URRSFRPSHQVDWLRQ



S
U





PV








U



U

S

3UH
FRQWURO

 U

7Q

.S


3,
6SHHG

6SHHGVHWSRLQW
U



U>@

U

U>@

U

U

FRQWUROOHU

7L

7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW

6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH



RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROKDVEHHQDFWLYDWHG S!



RQO\DFWLYHZLWK6/9&

Figure 6-18

7L

.S

7Q

6/9&

S

S

S

9&

S

S

S

Speed controller with droop

The droop function has a torque limiting effect on a drive that is mechanically coupled to a
different speed (e.g. guide roller on a goods train). In this way, a very effective load
distribution can also be realized in connection with the torque setpoint of a leading speedcontrolled drive. In contrast to torque control or load distribution with overriding and
limitation, with the appropriate setting, such a load distribution controls even a smooth
mechanical connection or the case of slipping.
This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked
with significant changes in speed.
The droop feedback is used, for example, in applications in which two or more motors are
connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements. It
limits the torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical connection between
the motors by modifying the speeds of the individual motors (drive is relieved when the
torque becomes too great).
Prerequisites
All connected drives must be operated with vector control and speed control (with or
without a sensor).
Only a single common ramp function generator may be used for mechanically coupled
drives.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6030 Speed setpoint, droop, acceleration model

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

239

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-23

6.4.2.5

Overview of important parameters (droop function)

Parameters

Description

p1488[0...n]

Droop input source

p1489[0...n]

Droop feedback scaling

p1492[0...n]

BI: Droop feedback enable

r1482

CO: Speed controller I torque output

r1490

CO: Droop feedback speed reduction

Torque control

Description
With sensorless speed control SLVC (p1300 = 20) or speed control with sensor VC (p1300 =
21), a switchover can be made to torque control (slave drive) via BICO parameter p1501. A
switchover cannot be made between speed and torque control if torque control is selected
directly with p1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and/or supplementary setpoint can be
entered using BICO parameter p1503 (CI: torque setpoint) or p1511 (CI: supplementary
torque setpoint). The supplementary torque is active both with torque and speed control.
This particular feature with the supplementary torque setpoint allows a pre-control torque to
be applied for speed control.
Note
For safety reasons, connecting to fixed torque setpoints is currently not possible.
Regenerative energy may accumulate, and this must be either fed back into the supply
system or converted into heat using a braking resistor.

240

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Kp

Speed setpoint

Tn

3,
VSHHG
FRQWUROOHU

Ti

r1547[0]

r1538

r0079

Torque setpoint
r1547[1]

r1539

Speed actual value


M_soll
p1503[C]
(0)
p1300 = M Reg
1

p1501
1=M_reg active
[FP2520.7] r1406.12
M_Zusatz 1

r1407.2
r1515

p1511[C]
(0)
M_Zusatz 1 Scal

p1512[C]
(0)

M_Zusatz 2 Scal

-2 000%...2 000%
p1514 [D] (100.0%)

M_Zusatz 2

p1513[C]
(0)

Figure 6-19

Closed-loop speed/torque control

The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque
setpoint. Above the maximum speed (p1082), a speed limiting controller reduces the torque
limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further.
True torque control (with self-adjusting speed) is only possible in closed-loop but not openloop control for sensorless vector control (SLVC). In open-loop control, the torque setpoint
adjusts the setpoint speed via a ramp function generator (integration time ~ p1499 x p0341 x
p0342). For this reason, sensorless torque control at standstill is only suitable for
applications that require an accelerating torque but no load torque (e.g. traction drives). This
restriction does not apply to torque control with sensor.

OFF responses
OFF1 and p1300 = 22, 23
Reaction as for OFF2
OFF2
Immediate pulse suppression, the drive coasts to standstill.
Power-on disable is activated.
OFF3
Switch to speed-controlled operation
n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp
(p1135).
The pulses are deleted at the end of the deceleration ramp or after a certain time (X x
ramp down time) has elapsed. Standstill is detected when the actual speed value is
less than the speed threshold (p1226) or when the monitoring time (p1227) that
started when speed setpoint speed threshold (p1226) has expired.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

241

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Power-on disable is activated.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6060 Torque setpoint

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-24

6.4.2.6

Overview of important parameters (torque control)

Parameters

Description

p0341

Motor moment of inertia

p0342

Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia

p1300

Open-loop/closed-loop control mode

p1499

Accelerating for torque control, scaling

p1501

BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control

p1503

CI: Torque setpoint

p1511

CI: Supplementary torque 1

p1512

CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling

p1513

CI: Supplementary torque 2

p1514

Supplementary torque 2 scaling

r1515

Supplementary torque total

Torque limiting

Description
S
S

7RUTXH
OLPLWV

U
U
0LQ

U
U

S

S
S

Figure 6-20

&XUUHQWOLPLW
0D[

U

U

3RZHU
OLPLWV

Torque limiting

The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be
configured for motor and regenerative mode.

242

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Torque limiting parameters


Table 6-25

Torque limiting parameters

Parameters

Description

p0640[0...n]

Current limit

p1520[0...n]

CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring

p1521[0...n]

CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerative

p1522[0...n]

CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring

p1523[0...n]

CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerative

p1524[0...n]

CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling

p1525[0...n]

CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling

p1530[0...n]

Power limit, motoring

p1531[0...n]

Power limit, regenerating

The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters:

Parameters for active torque limiting values


Table 6-26

Parameters for active torque limiting values

Parameters

Description

r0067

Maximum drive output current

r1526

Torque limit, upper/motoring without offset

r1527

Torque limit, lower/regenerative without offset

The following limits all apply to the torque setpoint, which is present either at the speed
controller output in the case of speed control, or at the torque input in the case of torque
control. The minimum/maximum value of the different limits is used in each case.
The minimum value is calculated cyclically and displayed in parameters r1538 and r1539.

Torque limit parameters


Table 6-27

Torque limit parameters

Parameters

Description

r1538

CO: Upper effective torque limit

r1539

CO: Lower effective torque limit

These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output/torque
input or indicate the instantaneous max. possible torque. If the torque setpoint is limited in
the motor module, this is indicated via the following diagnostic parameters:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

243

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Torque setpoint diagnostic parameter


Table 6-28

Torque setpoint diagnostic parameter

Parameters

Description

r1407.8

Upper torque limit active

r1407.9

Lower torque limit active

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6060 Torque setpoint
6630 Upper/lower torque limit
6640 Current/power/torque limits

6.4.2.7

Current setpoint filter

Description
The two current setpoint filters connected in series can be configured as follows:
Low-pass 2nd order (PT2): -40 dB/decade)
General 2nd-order filter
STARTER converts band-stop and low-pass with reduction in the parameters of the
general 2nd order filter.
Bandstop
Low-pass with reduction by a constant value
The phase frequency curve is shown alongside the amplitude log frequency curve. A
phase shift results in a control system delay and should be kept to a minimum.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6710 Current setpoint filters

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)

Table 6-29

244

Overview of important parameters (current setpoint filter)

Parameter
s

Function

p1655
...
p1666

CI: Current setpoint filter natural frequency tuning


...
Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.2.8

Current controller

Description
The default setting for the current controller is automatically derived from the motor data and
is usually adequate for most applications.
Ensure that the current controller is only optimized if:
the rating plate data are not completely known or autoidentification has not taken place
correctly. This means that no accurate motor data are available.
the motor has shut down due to overcurrent or current fluctuations.
the speed fluctuates (if the current controller is too slow, for example).
the dynamics of the current/speed controller do not appear adequate for the process.
In this case, select operating mode l/f (p1300 = 18) to optimize the following current
controller parameters with the aid of step responses:
p1715 Current controller gain
p1717 Current controller integral-time
For this purpose, record parameters r0075 and r0076 with the trace. The current setpoint
can be specified as a percentage of the rated motor current using p6890.
Note
If major adjustment of the current controller is unexpectedly necessary, this indicates that the
motor data was wrong or that there is severe non-linearity of the inductance (saturation). If
this is the case it is essential to check the motor and series reactor data.
If there is strong saturation then the current controller must not be set too rigidly. The
controller needs to be optimized to the inductance at the working point.
If the d/q axis of the motor is asymmetric (only for PEM) the current controller setting should
adjust to the axis with the lower inductance. Otherwise the other axis may become unstable.
If the converter has a sine-wave output filter then poorly dampened harmonic oscillations or
even shutdowns due to overcurrent may result. In this case, reduce the gain.

Function diagram (see List Manual)


6714 Vector control - Iq and Id controller

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

245

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.3

Vdc control

Description
9GFBUHJ7Q
S

9GFBPD[

9GFBUHJ.S
S
9GFBUHJFRQILJ
S

9GFBPD[(LQBSHJ
U

9GFBUHJWBUDWHBDFWLRQ
S


9GFBDFW



U

&RQWURO=6:

U
U



9GFBUHJBRXWSXW
9GFBPD[G\QBIDFWRU
S

U

,TBVHW
/LPLWDWLRQ

9GFBUHJ7Q
S
9GFBUHJWB
UDWHBDFWLRQ
9GFBUHJ.S
S
S
9GFBUHJFRQILJ
S

9GFBPLQ(LQBSHJ
U
9GFBDFW
U






&RQWURO=6:
U
U

9GFBPLQ
9GFBPLQG\QBIDFWRU
S

Figure 6-21

Vdc control vector

The "Vdc control" function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage
or undervoltage is present in the DC link.
Overvoltage in the DC link
Typical cause
The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the
DC link.
Remedy
Reduce the regenerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible
limits. With the Vdc controller activated, the converter may automatically extend the
ramp down time of a drive if the shutdown supplies too much energy to the DC link.
Undervoltage in the DC link
Typical cause
Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link.

246

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Remedy
Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses,
thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link (kinetic buffering).

Properties
Vdc control
This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering), which are
independent of each other.
Joint PI controller. The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control
independently of each other.
Vdc_max control
This function can be used to control momentary regenerative load without shutdown
using overvoltage in the DC link.
Vdc_max control is only recommended with a supply without active closed-loop control
for the DC link and without feedback.
Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering)
With this function, the kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link
voltage in the event of a momentary power failure, thereby delaying the drive.

Description of Vdc_min control


3RZHUUHVWRUH

3RZHUIDLOXUH
U

ZLWKRXW.,3IDXOW)

9

W
9GFFRQWUROOHU 
DFWLYH 
W
QVHW
ZLWKRXWSRZHUUHVWRUHIDXOW)

USP

7SRZHUBIDLO

W
W

,TVHW
$

PRWRUL]HG
UHJHQHUDWLYH

Figure 6-22

Switching Vdc_min control on/off (kinetic buffering)

In the event of a power failure, Vdc_min control is activated when the Vdc_min switch-in level
is undershot. This controls the DC link voltage and maintains it at a constant level. The motor
speed is reduced.
When the power supply is restored, the DC link voltage increases again and Vdc_min control
is deactivated at 5 % above the Vdc_min switch-on level. The motor continues operating
normally.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

247

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
If the power supply is not reestablished, the motor speed continues to drop. When the
threshold in p1257 is reached, this results in a response in accordance with p1256.
Once the time threshold (p1255) has elapsed without the line voltage being reestablished, a
fault is triggered (F07406), which can be parameterized as required (factory setting: OFF3).
The Vdc_min controller can be activated for a drive. Other drives can participate in
supporting the DC link, by transferring a scaling of their speed setpoint from the controlling
drive via BICO interconnection.
Note
Ensure that the converter is not disconnected from the line supply. It could become
disconnected if, for example, a circuit breaker drops out.

Description of Vdc_max control


>9@
6ZLWFKRQOHYHO
9GF

9GFFRQWUROOHUDFWLYH

W




W

_Q_
QDFW
QVHW

W

,TVHW
$

,TVHW 7RUTXHJHQHUDWLQJFXUUHQWVHWSRLQW

Figure 6-23

Switching Vdc_max control on/off

The switch-in level for Vdc_max control (r1242) is calculated as follows:


r1242 = p1241[%] * p0210 (device connection voltage, DC link)
Note
The crowbar is fired at 1.23 times the rated DC-link voltage

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6220 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller

248

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-30

6.4.4

Overview of key parameters (Vdc control)

Parameter

Description

p1240[0...n]

Vdc controller configuration (control)

p1241[0...n]

Vdc controller switch-in level [% of p210] (control)

r1242

Vdc_max controller switch-in level

p1243[0...n]

Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (control)

p1245[0...n]

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (control)

r1246

Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (control)

p1247[0...n]

Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (control)

p1249[0...n]

Vdc_max controller speed threshold (control)

p1250[0...n]

Vdc controller proportional gain (control)

p1251[0...n]

Vdc controller integral time (control)

p1252[0...n]

Vdc controller derivative time (control)

p1255[0...n]

Vdc_min controller time step (control)

p1256[0...n]

Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (control)

p1257[0...n]

Vdc_min controller speed threshold (control)

r1258

CO: Vdc controller output (control)

Flying restart

Description
The ability to add a machine on the fly is controlled using parameter P1200 (flying restart on
= 1/off = 0). If flying restart is off (default setting) then the drive always starts with a
frequency of zero. If it is turning nevertheless then overcurrents may result.
NOTICE
Under certain conditions during encoderless operation there may be a delay between the
command to enable operation and operation itself. This occurs when
the drive is operating without an encoder
the flying restart function is active
the motor terminals are temporarily disconnected from the converter by a switch.
In this case, the closed-loop control loses the voltage and speed information and must resynchronize itself. This process may take up to 30 seconds.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

249

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Residual tacho
If operating without a rotary transducer, the speed is estimated from the motor voltages.
Since these voltages can be very low and reduce with reducing speed there is a minimum
speed for each motor, from which the speed is displayed as zero.
P6702[0] Lower standstill threshold (default = 2% of rated motor speed)
P6702[1] Upper standstill threshold (default = 3% of rated motor speed)
NOTICE
These thresholds affect the flying restart function and should only be changed if
problems are encountered when adding drives at low speeds.

6.4.5

Automatic restart

Description
The automatic restart (WEA) starts the drive/drive group automatically when power is
restored after a power failure. All faults are automatically acknowledged and the drive is
powered-up again. This function is not only restricted to line supply faults; it can also be used
to automatically acknowledge faults and to restart the motor after any fault trips. The "flying
restart" function is activated internally so that the drive can be connected to a rotating motor
shaft.
WARNING
Death, serious injury or material damage can result if motors start up unexpectedly.
If p1210 is set to a value > 1, the motors can start automatically once the power supply has
been restored. This is especially critical, if, after longer line supply failures, motors come to
a standstill (zero speed) and it is incorrectly assumed that they have been powered-down.
Ensure that the motor cannot start unexpectedly.
Note
The converter may optionally be fitted with the VSM 10 line voltage sensing module (Option
L32) in order to safely detect the return of the power supply after a power failure of any
duration and restore operational readiness.
The VSM10 is always assigned to the DO of the infeed, i.e. DFEMV. The automatic restart
itself is in the DO VECTORMV.
An uninterruptible power supply (Option L53) must be used if the converter is to restart
automatically after failure of the electronics power supply.

250

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Special case of "Hot Standby" automatic restart


Note
The special case described here is not a WEA operating mode in the true sense (in which
error messages are acknowledged). However, in its external functionality it acts in exactly
the same way as the WEA for short power failures. Its particular advantage is its rapid
operational readiness after power is restored. The time taken to reach the load torque is
determined principally by the duration of the "Flying Restart".
The "Hot Standby" is activated when a power failure causes the DC link voltage to fall below
the PSA shutdown threshold (pulse block) but the LS remains connected.

Reduction in i/c
voltage without
line contactor
fault shutdown

Pre-charge
of i/c





,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH





Reduction in i/c
voltage (precharge off)

Pulse block
initiated by
FPGA

Reduction in i/c
voltage (precharge off)

Ready
to run

Pre-charge
of i/c

Charging of i/c
by pre-charge

Power restore

7LPHD[LV

Figure 6-24

Hot Standby

This diagram explains its function. The power supply may be restored at any time.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

251

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHZLWKOLQH
FRQWDFWRUIDXOW
VKXWGRZQ

5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJH SUH
FKDUJHRII

5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJH SUH
FKDUJHRII

5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHDV
UHVXOWRISRZHU
UHVWRUH

&RQQHFWLQJ
WKHOLQHFRQWDFWRU






~
~


3UHFKDUJLQJ
WKHLF

:($HQGHG

,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH



3UHFKDUJLQJ
WKHLF

:($EHFRPHVDFWLYH
$IWHU
IDXOWVKXWGRZQ

7LPHD[LV

Figure 6-25

DC link voltage after fault shutdown with active WEA.

Automatic restart mode


Table 6-31
p1210

WEA mode

Mode

Description

Disables automatic restart

Automatic restart inactive

Restart after power failure


(Hot Standby)

The "Hot Standby" is activated when a power failure causes


the DC link voltage to fall below the PSA shutdown threshold
(pulse block) (without a fault) but the LS remains connected or
if fault F30003 or F05206 has occurred in the infeed. If
additional faults are present, then these faults are also
acknowledged and when successfully acknowledged, the start
attempt is continued.
Failure of the 24 V power supply to the CU is not interpreted
as a power failure.

252

Restart after any fault with


additional start attempts
(HotStandby and WEA)

When p1210 = 6, an automatic restart is carried out after any


fault.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Setting the delay time for the start attempt (p1212)


Note
This delay time is dependent on the VSM on the infeed, as follows:
Without VSM: When the automatic restart (WEA) is active, all the faults present are
automatically acknowledged after this delay time and the ON command is generated
internally.
With VSM: When the automatic restart (WEA) is active, the system waits for the power
supply to return after this delay period within the time set in p1213 (when p1213=0, the
system waits an unlimited time for the power supply to return). When Bl: p1208 = 0/1
signal (power supply OK) all faults present are automatically acknowledged and the ON
command is generated internally.
The start attempt is successful if flying restart of the engine has been completed (r0056.4 =
1) and a further 10 seconds have expired.
If further faults occur between successful acknowledgement and the end of the startup
attempt, the WEA is interrupted.

Setting the monitoring time for line supply return (p1213)


The monitoring time starts after a power failure or fault. The drive must be operational again
within this time, otherwise a corresponding fault is generated.
Fault F07320 is displayed if the drive has not restarted successfully after the monitoring time
has expired (or a further fault occurs). Monitoring is deactivated when p1213 = 0.
If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212 and the additional delay time due to flying restart
and pre-charging, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. The monitoring time must
be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged
(e.g. when faults are permanently present).

Startup
1. Activate the function for drive object vector and infeed.
2. Set the WEA mode (p1210)
3. If necessary, set the BICOs (p1208)
4. Set the delay times (p1212, p1213)
5. Check the function.

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-32
Parameters

Overview of important parameters (WEA)


Description

r6530

Power supply status

p1208 BI

Automatic restart control word

r0046

Missing enable signals

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

253

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters

Description

p1210

Automatic restart mode

p1212

Automatic restart, delay time start attempts

p1213

Automatic restart, monitoring time line supply return

p1214

Automatic restart status word

Signaling
Automatic restart is indicated by alarm message A07321 "Drive: Automatic restart active".
A digital output signal must also be provided to indicate the beginning of the restart e.g.
optically by a warning light or acoustically by a buzzer.
The alarm message on restart is only generated if the motor is (almost) stationary, threshold:
100 rpm.

254

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Status diagram of the WEA


$5)

3RZHU2Q

$5)LVDFWLYHZKHQS 

+RW6WDQG%\

+6%\LVDFWLYHZKHQS



$,1,7
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
7KHFRPPLVVLRQLQJLVEHLQJ
H[HFXWHG,QYHUQDOYDULDEOH
LQLWLDOL]DWLRQ
3 

$Q\6WDWH

3 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
3 

3UHFKDUJHFRQWURO

&RPPLVVLRQLQJUHDG\

$FWLYDWHSUHFKDUJHLQ
WZRSRLQWFRQWUROPRGH
ZKHQ3 
0DGHZLWKKHOSRI%,&2

&,'/(

3 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
3 

:DLWIRU2QFRPPDQGDQG
ZDLWIRUHUURU
$5)UHVWDUWVWKHGULYHRQO\
LI$5)LVDFWLYH$1'DQ
HUURULVDFWLYH$1'DQ2Q
FRPPDQG

3

3UHFKDUJH
3



3 

$ODUP$FN

3 

$FNQRZOHGJH$ODUPV
ZKHQS 
,PSOHPHQWHGZLWK
LQWHUQDOFRQQHFWLRQVDQG
ZLWK%,&2

3 

3! $1'
8'&8QGHUYROWDJH


3 $1'
)DFWLYH


$Q\DFWLYHHUURU S $1'
3 


$WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV

 
&RGH 

$OKKDQGOHU
3

-+6%<:$,7
 
&RGH 

 
&RGH 
3>@
3
*ULGYROWDJH2.

7LPHUS6WDUW

:DLWIRUVLJQDO
6XS6HT5HDG\LWUHSRUWV
WKHJULGYROWDJHLVW2.
SXOVHVFRXOGEHUHHQDEOHG
3 

:DUQLQJ
6HWVLJQDO'ULYHZLOO
DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUW
ZKHQWLPHUUXQV
DQGZKHQ3 

*:$,73
VWDUWWLPHUE\UHTXHVW$1'
ZKHQS 
VWRSWLPHUZKHQ$5)LQ
,'/(VWDWHLV

:DLWEHIRUHHUURUFOHDU
WLPHGHWHUPLQHGE\S 
6WDUWWLPHS

*ULGYROWDJH2.

3 
70


WLPHURYHUIORZ
&RGH 

7LPHURYHUIORZ

,36$48,7
0RWRU6HT

*HQHUDWHVTXLWFRPPDQG
RQO\IRU36$WRH[LWIURP
SXOVHGLVDEOHGVWDWH
3 
ZLWKRXW960

6XSSUHVVHUURU)LI
+RW6WDQG%\UXQV
3 

ZLWK960

0RGLI\FRGH
'RQRWUHVWDUWWLPHU
&RGH 


$WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV

'$&.)$8/7
(UURUFOHDUVWDWH
3 

$FNDOOHUURUV
$WOHDVWRQHHUURU
SUHVHQWV
&RGH 

($5))$8/7
6HW(UURU)DGGLWLRQDO
LQIR &RGH
6WRSWLPHUS
3 


$WOHDVWRQH QHZ 
HUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH 


$WOHDVWRQH QHZ 
HUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH 

1RHUURU

1RHUURU

)*(121&0'
2QFRPPDQGJHQHUDWLRQ
IRU0RWRU6HTXHQFHU
3 

)LVDFNQRZOHGJHGE\XVHU


5HPDLQLQJYDOXHRIWLPHU33
&RGH 


6XSSO\6HTUHDG\

+:$51,1*


$WOHDVWRQH QHZ HUURU
SUHVHQWV
&RGH 

6WRSWLPHUS

:DUQLQJIRUXVHU'ULYHZLOO
DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUW
6WDUWWLPHS
3 
3 

DFWLYDWH

)O\UHVWDUWFRQWURO

3 25
7LPHUWLPHRXW25
0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ


3 25
7LPHUWLPHRXW25
0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ

6WDUWIO\UHVWDUWIXQFWLRQE\
UHTXHVW6WRSLWZKHQWKH
SXOVHVDUHHQDEOHG$1'
+RW6WDQG%\LVLQDFWLYH

(QDEOHSXOVHV
)O\UHVWDUW

.021,725
0RWRUVHT

:DLWLQJDVKRUWWLPH 
VHF WREHVXUHWKHGULYH
UXQVZLWKRXWHUURUWKH
UHVWDUWZDVVXFFHVIXOO
3 


7LPHUWLPHRXW

Figure 6-26

Status diagram WEA

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

255

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.6

Bypass function

Description
The bypass function "Synchronization with overlapping" can be used during vector control
and with induction motors without encoders.
It functions as a controller of two circuit breakers via digital outputs of the converter and
evaluates the check-back signals of the circuit-breakers via digital inputs (e.g. via TM15).
This circuit allows the motor to be operated using the converter or directly on the supply line.
The circuit breakers are activated by the converter. The check-back signals for the circuit
breaker positions have to be returned to the converter.
When the bypass function (parameter p1260=1) is activated, the motor is synchronized and
transferred to the power system and then retrieved. During the changeover, both circuit
breakers K1 and K2 are closed at the same time for a period (phase lock synchronization). A
throttle is used to uncouple the converter voltage and power system voltage, the uk value for
the throttle is 10 % +/- 2 %.


.

.

Figure 6-27

Connection example for bypass

The bypass is also shut down when one of the "OFF2" or "OFF3" control word signals is
canceled.
Exception to this:
The bypass switch can be locked as needed by a higher-level controller in such a manner
that the converter can be completely (i.e. including the control electronics) shutdown
while the motor is driven on the power system. The circuit breaker locking must be carried
out on the system side.
When a converter is restarted after POWER OFF, the status of the bypass circuit breaker
is evaluated. This allows the converter to switch directly to "ready to switch on" mode

256

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
after powering up. This is only possible if the bypass is activated via a control signal and
the control signal (p1266) is still on after the power up.
A change of the converter into "ready to switch on and bypass" mode after power up has
a higher priority than the automatic restart.
The two motor switches must be designed for switching under load.

Requirements
The bypass function is only possible during encoder-less speed control (p1300 = 20) and
with the use of an induction motor.
For synchronization with over-lapping, a VSM10 must be used.

Commissioning and activation


The bypass function is a component of the "Technology controller" function module. This
function module can be activated when you work through the commissioning wizard in
OFFLINE mode.
With OFFLINE activation, the Technology controller function module must be loaded to the
target system (1).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

257

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Figure 6-28

Activating the bypass function

Via parameter p0108.16, you can check whether the technology controller function module
has been successfully activated (2).

Figure 6-29

Check of the bypass function

In addition, macro 1582 must be executed in parameter p0015 for the bypass option (p0015
= 1582).

Example:
After the bypass function with synchronization with over-lapping (p1260 = 1) is activated, the
following parameters must also be set:

258

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Table 6-33

Parameter setting

Parameter

Description

p1266 =

Setting the control signal source

p1269[0] =

Signal source for the ON check-back signal of contactor K1

p1269[1] =

Signal source for the ON check-back signal of contactor K2

p3800 = 1

For synchronization, the internal voltages are used.

p3801 = 2

Syc-network drive drive object number

P6674[1]
...
p6689[1]

Settings and interface K1

P6674[2]
...
p6689[2]

Settings and interface K2

0RWRU
RQWKH
FRQYHUWHU

&KDQJHRYHU
SURFHGXUH
&RQYHUWHUSRZHU
VXSSO\V\VWHP

0RWRU
FRQQHFWHGWRVXSSO\
V\VWHP

&KDQJHRYHU
SURFHGXUH
3RZHUVXSSO\
V\VWHPFRQYHUWHU

0RWRU
RQWKHFRQYHUWHU

SE\SDVVFRPPDQG
U
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQUHTXHVWHG
E\E\SDVVIXQFWLRQ
U
6\QFKURQLVPDFKLHYHG

U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG
U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG

Figure 6-30

Signal diagram for bypass

Transfer of the motor to the network


(Circuit breakers K1 and K2 are controlled via the converter):
In the initial state, switch K1 is closed, switch K2 is opened and the motor is operated by
the converter.
The "Command bypass" control bit (p1266) is set (e.g. by the higher-level automation).
The bypass function sets the "Synchronize" control word bit (r1261.2).
Since the bit is set while the converter is running, the "Transfer motor to supply"
synchronization process is started.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

259

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
After the motor has been successfully synchronized to the line frequency, line voltage
and line phase, the synchronizing algorithm reports this status (r3819.2).
The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes switch K2 (r1261.1 = 1).
Once switch K2 has reported "closed" status (r1269[1] = 1), switch K1 is opened and the
converter blocks the pulse. The converter is in Ready to Operate and bypass state.
If the ON command in this phase is taken away, the converter changes to the basic
"Ready to Switch On" status. The converter is separated from the line and the DC circuit
is discharged.

Retrieving the motor from line operation


Retrieving the motor from supply mode functions the same yet in reverse: At the start of the
process, switch K2 is closed and switch K1 is opened.
The "Command bypass" control bit is canceled (e.g. by the higher-level automation).
The bypass function sets the "Synchronize" control word bit.
Pulses are enabled. Since "Synchronize" is set before "Pulse enable", the converter
interprets this as a command to retrieve a motor from the supply and to take it over.
After the motor has been successfully synchronized to the line frequency, line voltage
and line phase, the synchronizing algorithm reports this status.
The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes contactor K1.
Once switch K1 has reported "closed" status, switch K2 is opened and the motor is
operated again on the converter.

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-34

Overview of key parameters (bypass function)

Parameter

Description

Bypass function
p1260

Bypass configuration

r1261

CO/BO: CO/BO: Bypass control/status word

p1266

BI: BI: Bypass control signal

p1268

BI: Bypass check-back signal synchronization completed

p1269

BI: Bypass switch check-back signal source

Synchronization
p3800

260

Sync network drive activation

p3801

Sync network drive drive object number

p3802

BI: Sync network drive enable

r3803t

CO/BO: Sync network drive control word

r3804

CO: Sync network drive target frequency

r3805

CO: Sync network drive frequency difference

p3806

Sync network drive frequency difference threshold value

r3808

CO: Sync network drive phase difference

p3809

Sync network drive phase setpoint value

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter

Description

p3811

Sync network drive frequency limitation

r3812

CO: Sync network drive correction frequency

p3813

Sync network drive phase synchronism threshold value

r3814

CO: Sync network drive voltage difference

p3815

Sync network drive voltage difference threshold value

r3819

CO/BO: Sync network drive status word

P6670[1]...p6690[1]

Switch 1

P6670[2]...p6690[2]

Switch 2

Function diagram (see List Manual)


FP 7020

6.4.7

Staging function

6.4.7.1

Description of the staging function

Introduction
The bypass control is used in so-called "staging" applications.

Description
With staging, the flow rate of a pump station, for example, is divided among several motors.
All the motors can either be at rest, be controlled at the converter or run strictly on the infeed
line. There is only one converter for the entire system.
To set the flow rate, the required number of motors are powered up and switched to the line
using the bypass function. An additional motor can operate continuously on the converter
and it can stagelessly regulate the flow rate. If more output is required than the regulated
motor can deliver, it is connected to the line via the bypass function and an additional motor
is started using the now available converter. Conversely, the output can be reduced by
stopping the regulated motor and retrieving a line-driven motor, which is then regulated.

External control
For the required switching procedures, one line-side bypass switch and one converter-side
bypass switch is required for each motor. The switch-over between the individual motors is
coordinated by an external controller. Just as for a normal bypass, the converter detects only
one motor and controls its line-side and converter-side bypass switch.
The external controller's task is:
To connect to the converter the control and check-back signal of the two switches of the
motor that is currently supposed to be operated with the converter.
To keep the other motors in "Off" or "line mode" status.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

261

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
To supply the converter with the required control commands.
The figure shows an example for staging with 4 motors. (The "external controller" is not
shown separately. Instead, it is shown as a component of the "converter with VSM").
6LJQDOOLQHVIRUVZLWFKDFWLYDWLRQGLVSOD\HGLQVLPSOLILHGIRUP
6XSSO\V\VWHP

3URWHFWLYHHTXLSPHQW
&RQYHUWHUZLWK960
.

.

5HDFWRU
%XVEDU

.

.

.

.
.

0

0

0

0

Figure 6-31

.

.

.

Example: Staging with 4 motors

There is a staging signal, which makes it possible to switch motors without operating the line
switch (staging without staging command).

6.4.7.2

Staging without a staging command

Function Principle
The external controller connects the first motor with the converter to the line. Then it must
lock the line-side bypass switch in the "ON" status and completely shut down the converter.
Now the external controller can switch the control signals and feedback signals of the
switches to a different motor and switch on the converter again.
This motor can run in bypass or sit idle, because the converter firmware detects the status
when ramping up and its sequence control starts accordingly. The only prerequisite is that
the status must agree with the bypass setpoint command, otherwise a fault occurs.
The disadvantage of this however is that the converter must be completely shutdown during
each motor change, which can lead to very long change-over times and unnecessary wear
of the infeed switch, especially for large converters. To fulfill the requirements of staging, a
motor change must be possible in "ready for operation and bypass" status.

262

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.7.3

Staging with a staging command

Introduction
To preclude the disadvantages of "staging without a staging command," staging command
BI p2369 is initiated. It has the following characteristics.

Characteristics
When the staging signal arrives, K1 is opened and the pulses are disabled.
As long as the staging signal remains pending, the monitoring systems of the bypass
switch check-back signals in the circuit-breaker control module are frozen (i.e., checkback signal "ON/OFF" is set internally as per the "ON/OFF" command, and all other
check-back signals are set internally to High.)
When the staging signal arrives, the "check" status is forced in the bypass sequencer.
This check reads the check-back signals of the bypass switches and compares them with
the bypass command (you can find more detailed information in the Section "Arrival of
Staging-signal").

Principle of operation


.

.

Figure 6-32

Connection example for bypass

Arrival of the staging signal


K1 is opened and the pulses are disabled.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

263

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Presence of the staging signal (staging status)


As long as the staging signal is present, the external controller can switch the control signals
and check-back signals to a different motor.
The converter is kept in "pulse disabled" only for safety reasons, because the external
controller should have already switched to operating status "Ready to Switch On" or "Ready
to Operate" before the staging signal.
To ensure that the converter generates the right command for K2 when exiting the staging
status, the bypass sequencer in the staging status issues a command for K2, which
correspond to the check-back signal from K2.
If the check-back signal of K2 changes from 0 to 1, the converter generates an ON
command for K2. The actual control of K21, K22 must therefore be locked during the
staging of the external controller.
As long as the staging signal is present, the monitoring systems of the bypass switch checkback signals are disabled.
NOTICE
Should the staging switch-over procedure run in an uncoordinated way (e.g. K2 is closed by
the converter without the motor turning), the motor is firmly switched to the medium voltage
line.
If the over-current protection of K2 is not correctly set, the converter or the motor can
become damaged.
Ensure therefore that the over-current protection is correctly set.

Arrival of the staging signal


When the staging signal arrives, the "check" status is enabled in the bypass sequencer. This
check reads the check-back signals of the bypass switches and compares them with the
bypass command.
If both switches K1 and K2 are open and the bypass command p1266 is not set, the motor is
at rest. The converter switch K1 is closed and the controller is waiting for the operating or
bypass command.
If line switch K2 is closed and p1266 is set, the motor is in bypass mode. Control of K2 is set,
and the controller switches to operating state "Ready to Operate" and "Bypass"
If the switching status of K2 does not agree with p1266, fault F7312 is triggered.
If K1 is closed, it always triggers an error (F7311) because the converter switch can only be
controlled by the converter.
If the motor is running in bypass mode, the controller of the line-side switch K2 must be
locked in the ON status before the external controller sets the command p2369.

264

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6.4.7.4

Sequence of a motor change

Initial state
For a motor change, the external controller must adhere to the following sequence. As an
example (switch designation), a change from motor 1 to motor 2 is described:
Initial state: The converter is switched on (STW1.0 = 1) or in the
ready to operate status, then K11 is closed and K21 is opened. The motor is at rest,
p1266 = 0

.

.

67$*,1*

.

.

0

Figure 6-33

0

Converter status ready to operate

or
status ready to operate and bypass, then K11 is opened and K21 is closed. The motor 1
is running in bypass, p1266 = 1.

.

.

67$*,1*

.

.

0

Figure 6-34

0

Converter status ready to operate and bypass

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

265

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Procedure
Lock the controller K21 in the ON status (only for initial status "ready to operate and
bypass")
Set the staging signal p2369.
The converter takes back the control from K1.
The control and check-back signals change from K11 and K21 to K12 and K22
If the motors have different characteristics, a motor data set change-over must be
carried out.
Set the command p1266 according to the status of motor 2.
Reset the staging signal p2369.
The converter controls switch K12 or K22 depending on the status of motor 2.
Only if motor 2 was in bypass: Release the lock of K22.
The converter now has control over motor 2 and can synchronize it to the line or
retrieve it from the line and continue to operate it (regulated) or stop it.
The following diagram clarifies the 4 possible transitions between 2 motors:

266

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU

0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU

0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH

0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH

.

.

.

67$*,1*

.

67$*,1*

.

0

.

0

.

0

0

0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH

0RWRU0E\SDVVBPRGH

0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH

0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH

.

.

.

67$*,1*

0

.

67$*,1*

.

.

.

.

.

0

Figure 6-35

Transitions between two motors

6.4.8

Output-end disconnector or circuit breaker

6.4.8.1

Description

0

0

This function supports options L51 "Output-side disconnector" and L52 "Output-side circuit
breaker".
The output-side disconnector increases the safety of staff, converter and motor, e.g. during
maintenance work. A disconnector or circuit breaker can also isolate the faulty system during

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

267

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
redundancy changeover. The switch used depends on the changeover time required or
whether there are higher isolation requirements.
Option L51 facilitates the "Safe torque off" function which frequently uses switching devices
between the converter and motor even in modern plant engineering systems. All safety
functions (e.g. disconnector off status message) are carried out using external modules (e.g.
protection-safety combinations). The drive only supports activation and deactivation of the
disconnector, which is coordinated by its own sequencer. The function described here
should therefore not be confused with the "Safe Torque Off" safety function of other
SINAMICS devices and for this reason is not relevant to certification.
Output-side circuit breaker L52 is, for example, not required in a permanent-magnet
synchronous motor (PEM). Unlike the disconnector, it also has the function of protecting the
converter. Unlike other types of motor, the PEM constantly discharges voltage if it is not
running. Feedback to the DC link, e.g. in case of a fault, can therefore only be prevented by
a switch between the converter and the motor. The same is true if the PEM is operating in
the field weakening range: with a pulse block field weakening is lost via the negative fieldgenerating current and the machine can discharge a terminal voltage which is far above the
rated voltage. This voltage may exceed the capacity of the converter and must therefore be
disconnected by a switch.
Dimensioning of the switch is project-dependent and must be appropriate for the application.
In particular, the circuit breaker must be dimensioned for the currents which may arise when
a fault occurs.
A disconnector can only switch very small currents. Therefore, it may be necessary to wait
until the current has fallen to almost zero before opening it. The main task is to disconnect
the electricity supply. Circuit breakers, on the other hand, can switch short-circuit currents.
The switch response occurs immediately on the switch command. The type of switch used
will depend on the option selected.

Overview
Both options L51 and L52 are realized separately and in principle may be selected together.
The diagram below gives an overview of the possible switches at the converter output
(together with option L29 "Bypass control").

268

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

6XSSO\VLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
E\SDVV
3RZHU
VXSSO\

0RWRUVLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU

2XWJRLQJ
LVRODWRU

0RWRUVLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
E\SDVV

)LOWHU<
RU
UHDFWRU

,QYHUWHU

0RWRU
2SWLRQ/

2SWLRQ/

2SWLRQ/

6ZLWFK
70PRGXOH

6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK

7KHIHHGEDFNVLJQDOVIURPWKHVZLWFKHVDUHPRQLWRUHGE\%L&RLQSXWV
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
,IRQHRIWKHVHVZLWFKHVLVQRWSUHVHQWWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJELWLQSPXVWEHVHWWR GHIDXOW 
7KHVXSSO\VLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHURIWKHPRWRULVXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKHPRWRUGLUHFWO\WRWKHSRZHUV\VWHP E\SDVV 
7KHPRWRUVLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU E\SDVV PXVWZKHQVHHQIURPWKHFRQYHUWHUEHGRZQVWUHDPRIVZLWFKHVDQGWKHILOWHUUHDFWRU

Figure 6-36

Output-side disconnect switch

6.4.8.2

Switching conditions for the disconnector

Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Switching
status

Switching conditions

S1, S2

BI1) = 0: Switch off when I=zero


BI1) = 1: no change of status, i.e. if the disconnector is On it remains On, if it is
Off it remains Off.

S3a

BI1) = 0: Switch off when I=zero


BI1) = 1: Switch on once pre-charging is complete and line side switch is
connected.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

269

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Switching
status

Switching conditions

S3

S3 is reached from S3a when the disconnector is On (feedback signal) AND BI = 1


BI1) = 0: Switch off when I=zero
BI1) = 1: Switch on (DC link is pre-charged)

S4

S4 is reached from S3 when the disconnector is On (feedback signal) AND BI = 1


BI1) = 0 / BI1) = 1: no effect, disconnector remains On

S5a, S5b

S5a/S5b is only reached from S4


BI1) = 0 / BI1) = 1: no effect, disconnector remains On

S7

As S1, S2:
BI1) = 0: Switch off when I=zero
BI1) = 1: no change of status

Fault:

BI1) = 0 / BI1) = 1: no effect, switching status is maintained

1)

BI indicates BICO input p6717[0]

The disconnector switching status is applied as a switch-on condition in r0046 "Infeed


missing enable signal". Alarm A7919 is triggered if the disconnector is switched off and
operation enable signal STWA.3 is set in status S3. This alarm also warns the operator that
a switch-on condition is missing.
For the user, the control system described has the following features:
The BI must be set so that S3 Ready to run and S4 Running are reached when the
system is switched on.
In status S3 Ready to run, the disconnector may be switched on and off with the Bl in
order to give the safe disconnection required. It must be switched on again before
operation.
If the BI is fixed parameterized to 1, the disconnector is switched on when the system is
first activated.
It remains On (even when the converter is switched on and off) until it is switched off
externally or the parameterization is removed. The purpose of this is to save on switching
cycles, particularly when converter faults occur.

Trace of switch-off characteristics


Switch-off characteristics for OFF1: Switching operation when I = 0 A

270

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Figure 6-37

Driver deactivation for OFF1

Switch-off characteristics for OFF2: Switching operation when I = 0 A

Figure 6-38

Driver deactivation for OFF2

Switch-off characteristics for OFF3: Switching operation when I = 0 A

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

271

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Figure 6-39

Driver deactivation for OFF3

6.4.8.3

Switching conditions for the output circuit breaker

Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Unlike the disconnector, in all safety cutouts with OFF2 in which the converter is also
disconnected from the power supply, the circuit breaker must also switch off.

272

Switching
status

Switching conditions

S1, S2

Switch off, BI has no effect

S3a

S3

S3 is only reached from S3a when the output-side circuit breaker (ALS) is On
(feedback signal) AND BI = 1
BI1) = 0: Switch off
BI1) = 1: Switch on or cause to be switched on when switch-on conditions are
met .
Special case, only when p643 = 0 and PEM: BI1) = 1 and "n permissible"2) are
not met or an encoder fault is indicated: switch off

BI1) = 0: Switch off


BI1) = 1: Switch on if switch-on conditions are met.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Switching
status

Switching conditions

S4

S4 is only reached from S3 when the output-side circuit breaker (ALS) is On


(feedback signal) AND BI1) = 1
BI1) = 0 / BI1) = 1: no effect, output-side circuit breaker (ALS) remains On

S5a, S5b

S5a/S5b is only reached from S4


BI1) = 0 / BI1) = 1: no effect, output-side circuit breaker (ALS) remains On

S7

As S3:
BI1) = 0: Switch off
BI1) = 1: Switch on if switch-on conditions are met.

Fault:
1) BI

Switch off, BI has no effect

is BICO input p6717[1]

2) The

peak terminal voltage value is not significantly higher than the DC link voltage in order to
prevent large surge currents over the regenerative-circuit diodes of the inverter.

The circuit breaker switching status is applied as a switch-on condition in r0046 "Infeed
missing enable signal". Alarm A7919 is generated if
the switch is switched off (because the enable signal via p6717 is missing or because
PEM speed is too high), and if operation enable signal STWA.3 is set in status S3.
the switch should be switched on (in S3a, S3, S7) but the enable signal is missing
because the PEM speed is too high.
For the user, the actuation system described has the following features:
The BI must be set so that S3 Ready to run and S4 Running are reached when the
system is switched on.
In status S3 Ready to run, the ALS (output-side circuit breaker) may be switched on and
off as required like a disconnector using the BI. It must be switched on again before
operation.
In operating status S4, S5a and S5b the ALS cannot be switched off via the BI; this
prevents a "hard shut-down". If the user wishes to open the output-side circuit breaker
ALS as quickly as possible during operation, he must follow the normal switch-off
procedure and cancel first the operation command (STWA.3) then the on command
(STWA.0).
For all faults with response OFF2, the output-side switch is also switched off; this is also
the case for responses OFF1/3 if status S1 is reached from the fault once the system has
stopped.
In status S3, if the BI is set to 1 and the operation enable signal has been given but the
sequence controller has not yet activated the output-side circuit breaker (ALS) because
the PEM speed is too high, operation will restart without any further input from the user
once the speed has dropped.

6.4.8.4

Startup

Description

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

273

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Activate the function for the VectorMV drive object via p0015 or the starter.

Figure 6-40

Activating the function for VectorMV drive object

If necessary, set the BICOs (p6717)


Configure the switches as described in the examples below.

Configuring the disconnector (example)


Generate a user list in object VectorMV_03 with the parameters given below and carry
out the interconnections shown using object VectorMV_03 p10 = 2:
Note
The wiring connections shown in the diagram have been made according to function
diagrams 9800, 9801 and 9802. You will find the function diagrams in the List Manual on the
CD supplied with the converter.
The macros for options L51 and L52 merely preassign parameter settings, but have no effect
on the wiring connections.

274

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Figure 6-41

User list in object VectorMV_03

Note
The parameterizations must be suitable for the disconnect switch.
Some parameters can only be changed when p9 = 3 is set in the object CU.

Then set parameters p10 = 0 and p9 = 0

Configuring the motor-side circuit breaker (example)

Figure 6-42

Motor-side LSS

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

275

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

TM15 module interconnections (example)

Figure 6-43

Interconnections from the point of view of the TM15 module

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-35

276

Overview of important parameters (commissioning of output-side disconnect switch)

Parameter

Description

p15

Macro drive object.

p6717 BI

Motor switch / disconnector enable signal

p0643

Overvoltage protection for permanent-magnet synchronous motors.

r6660-6692

Switch parameters

r0046[21]

Feedback switch

r0046[22]

Feedback switch

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

NOTICE
If the terminal voltage of the PEM (permanent-magnet motor) is too high when the motor
switch is switched on, the converter switches off using OFF2 and crowbar firing. Surge
currents on powering up may cause damage to the converter.
A rotary encoder is essential for overvoltage protection of the PEM.
At setting p0643 = 0 operation is impossible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
At setting p0643 = 1 operation is possible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
Setting p0643 = 1 is only permissible if the dimensioning of the converter and motor and
the type of loading guarantee that the supply voltage generated by the PEM cannot exceed
the maximum permitted level.
A supply voltage which is higher than the permitted level may be produced under two
circumstances:
The closed-loop control system is operating the PEM above the rated speed in the field
weakening range. If a pulse block occurs (during operation or after a fault), the PEM
generates a terminal voltage which is higher than the rated voltage
The load itself can accelerate the idling motor over its rated speed
If one of these circumstances occurs, the overvoltage protection must not be switched off
with p0643 = 1. The motor must be operated with a rotary encoder.
Fit the system with a rotary encoder as described above if the dimensioning and
dynamometer cannot prevent these non-permissible terminal voltages from occurring in the
PEM.

Signaling
A missing enable signal for the motor switch/disconnector is indicated by alarm A07919.
If the switch is enabled, it switches on. The alarm is acknowledged.

6.4.9

Switching frequency reduction

Description
For heavy starting the switching frequency can be reduced to minimize losses when using
the motor inverter at low output frequencies.
The switching frequency is reduced linearly and incrementally for output frequencies below a
parameterizable threshold. The number of reduction steps can also be parameterized. The
factory setting is that switching frequency is not active initially (number of reduction steps
p6975 = 0, output frequency threshold p6976 = 0 Hz).
The frequency range below the frequency threshold p6976 is divided into ranges of equal
size. The number of ranges corresponds to the number of reduction steps p6975 (maximum
5). The user determines the initial reduction of switching frequency by choosing the number

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

277

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
of reduction steps. 5 reduction steps mean an initial reduction rate of 5 (switching frequency
reduced by 50%), 4 reduction steps an initial reduction rate of 4 (40%), etc.
If the output frequency increases, the switching frequency is reduced by less and less until
the rated switching frequency is reached on exceeding the threshold.

'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ

1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV






2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG

'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ

1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV





2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG

Figure 6-44

Example: Switching frequency reduction for two different numbers of reduction steps

The maximum parameterizable output frequency threshold depends on the set rated
switching frequency and is automatically limited when parameterization is unsuitable.
Irrespective of the parameterization, the switching frequency reduction remains restricted to
space vector approximation (SVA) mode, i.e. the switching frequency reduction has no effect
once it leaves the SVA range.
Fine adjustment factor p6961 is available except for incremental switching frequency
reduction. Thus the switching frequency in the entire SVA range can be multiplied by a fixed
factor between 0.8 and 1.2.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6760 Switching frequency reduction for space vector approximation (SVA)

278

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-36
Parameter
s

6.4.10

Overview of important parameters (switching frequency reduction)


Description

p6975

Number of reduction steps (max. 5)

p6976

Output frequency threshold (may be internally limited)

p6961

Fine adjustment factor

Technology function: friction characteristic curve

Description
The friction characteristic curve compensates for the friction torque of the motor and the
driven machine. A friction characteristic curve enables the speed controller to be precontrolled and improves the response.
10 interpolation points are used for each friction characteristic curve. The coordinates of an
interpolation point are described by a speed (p382x) and a torque parameter (p383x)
(interpolation point 1 = p3820 and p3830).

Characteristics
10 interpolation points are available for mapping the friction characteristic curve.
An automatic function allows you to record the friction characteristic curve (record friction
characteristic curve).
A connector output (r3841) can be applied as friction torque (p1569).
The friction characteristic curve can be activated and deactivated (p3842).

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


6710 Current setpoint filters
7010 Friction characteristic curve

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-37

Overview of important parameters (friction characteristic curve)

Parameter
s

Description

p3820
...
p3839

Friction characteristic curve value n0


...
friction characteristic curve value M9

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

279

Start

Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter
s

Description

r3840

CO/BO: Friction characteristic curve status

r3841

CO: Friction characteristic curve output

p3842

Activate friction characteristic curve

p3845

Activate friction characteristic plot

Commissioning via parameters


In p382x, speeds for the measurement are predefined as a function of the maximum speed
p1082 during initial commissioning. They can be changed appropriately.
The automatic friction characteristic plot can be activated using p3845. The characteristic
curve is then plotted the next time that it is enabled.
The following settings are possible:
p3845 = 0 Friction characteristic curve recording deactivated
p3845 = 1 Friction characteristic curve recording activated, all directions of rotation
The friction characteristic curve is recorded in both directions of rotation. The results of the
positive and negative measurement are averaged and entered in p383x.
p3845 = 2 Friction characteristic curve recording activated, positive direction of rotation
p3845 = 3 Friction characteristic curve recording activated, negative direction of rotation
DANGER
The motor can run at up to the maximum speed. This may result in death, serious injury,
or material damage.
When the friction characteristic curve is plotted, the drive can cause the motor to move.
As a result, the motor may reach maximum speed.
Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP functions are fully operational during
commissioning. Observe the appropriate safety regulations.

Commissioning via starter


In STARTER, the friction characteristic curve can be started up via the dialog under
"Functions".

280

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions

6.5

Monitoring and protective functions

6.5.1

Block protection

Description
The error message "Motor blocked" is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the
variable speed threshold set in p2175. For vector control the speed controller must also be at
the limit.
Once the ON delay (p2177) has elapsed, the message "Motor blocked" and fault F7900 are
generated.
USP
S 

QBDFW

QBDFWS

U

S!9HFWRUFRQWUROV
S!9IFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQWUROPRGH
S
6SHHGFRQWUROOHUDWOLPLW
U

&XUUHQWOLPLWUHDFKHG
U

Figure 6-45




0RWRUORFNHG
U



)

S 
V
21GHOD\

Block protection

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


8012 Torque messages, motor blocked/stalled

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-38

Overview of important parameters (block protection)

Parameters

Description

p2175

Speed threshold motor blocked

p2177

Delay time motor blocked

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

281

Start

Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions

6.5.2

Thermal motor protection

Description
The main task of motor protection is to identify critical situations. If alarm thresholds are
exceeded, the user can set parameterizable response options (p0610) that enable continued
operation (e.g. with reduced power) and prevent immediate shutdown.
12t motor monitoring can be activated without a temperature sensor. This does not
reduce power.
Values measured by motor temperature sensors can be obtained and monitored by
connecting and evaluating temperature modules by means of terminal modules.
Automatic power reduction can take place based on these actual values.

I2t monitoring
The functionality is activated using parameter p6550. The alarm and fault thresholds can be
entered in parameters p0605 and p0604. Parameter p0606 is used to enter a time stage
which also triggers a fault if the alarm threshold is continuously exceeded.
For 12t monitoring, the thermal time constant of the motor p6653 must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to reach 98% of its rated temperature at rated voltage, rated current,
rated frequency and ambient temperature. Additionally, in a self-cooled motor (p0335 = 0)
the cooling time constant when stationary p6654 that is entered must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to cool from rated temperature to ambient temperature.
Furthermore, for self-cooled machines, a capacity utilization characteristic curve for
operation at less than rated speed must be entered using parameters p6555, p6556 and
p6557.

Power reduction
This functionality enables thermal monitoring of two motor temperature sensors. These are
imported via a terminal module and connected to connectors p0603.0 and p0603.1. A
characteristic curve for temperature-dependent power reduction to 75% can be established
using parameters p0616 and p0618 together with p0617 and p0619. The reduction output
value is connected to power limiting p1555; an alarm or fault is triggered when the thresholds
are reached.

Function diagrams for thermal motor protection (see List Manual)


8016 Thermal monitoring motor
8017 I2t motor monitoring

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-39
Parameters

Overview of important parameters (thermal motor protection)


Description
Power reduction parameters

282

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Parameters

Description

r0035

Motor temperature, temperature sensor 1

p0603

Motor temperature source

p0610

Response to motor overtemperature condition

p0616

Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1

p0617

Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 2

p0618

Motor overtemperature fault threshold 1

p0619

Motor overtemperature fault threshold 2

r0034

Motor load

r0066

Output frequency

r0068

Absolute current actual value

p0305

Rated motor current

p0335

Motor cooling type

p0604

12t fault threshold

p0605

12t alarm threshold

p0606

12t time stage

p6550

Activate 12t motor monitoring

p6651

Activate 12t alarm output

Parameters for 12t monitoring

6.5.3

p6652

Activate 12t fault output

p6653

12t motor monitoring thermal time constant

p6654

12t motor monitoring cooling time constant, self-cooling

p6655

12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 0.0 self-cooling

p6656

12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 0.5 self-cooling

p6657

12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 1.0 self-cooling

Circuit breaker switching cycle

Description
This function is an extension of the "circuit breaker actuation" feature.
The software includes two counters per circuit breaker which record circuit breaker switching
operations under load and without load. The two counter readings are added and compared
with a freely parameterizable threshold (p6710), then an alarm is generated (F7322).
Two thresholds (p6710 and p6711) and therefore two alarms (F7322 and F7323) are
provided. The first alarm warns the user that the service life of the circuit breaker is nearing a
critical range. The second alarm indicates that the critical range has been reached.
No fault is displayed when the second threshold is exceeded because it is sufficient to
display the parameters in the experts list. The parameter values are saved in the PSA after
every change to the counter readings.
There are three different converter and circuit breaker combinations:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

283

Start

Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Table 6-40

Converter and circuit breaker combinations


Condition
1

GM 150

New

New

Used

Circuit breaker

New

Used

New

Condition description
Conditio
n

Description

The counters are in the zero position and the appropriate counter increments after each
switching operation.

For the used circuit breaker, the number of switching cycles with and without load must be
estimated and entered in the appropriate parameters (p6710, p6711).
This also applies if the converter PSA is changed.
The counter positions must be read from the "old" PSA and transferred to the "new" one.

The counter for the new circuit breaker must be returned to zero. Access level 3 is
required to do this.

The setting parameters (p6710, p6711) are available from access level 3, whereas the
visualization parameters may be accessed from level 1.
An available line side switch may be used in retrofit systems. Three parameters are therefore
provided for modifying counter readings.
The first parameter (p6714) contains the number of load-free switching cycles.
The second (p6715) contains the number of switching cycles under load.
The third parameter is used to transfer these two values.
Transfer of these parameter values is only permitted at access level 3.

Counter conditions
Whether switching should take place with or without load depends on the type of
disconnection.
Operational disconnection (OFF1 and OFF3) counts as switching without load.
Fault shutdown (OFF2 response) counts as switching under load.
A factor can be set using p6712 to take account of the higher loading on the circuit breaker
when switching under load. This factor affects the reading on the "switching cycles under
load" counter.

Startup
Set the parameters correctly.

284

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-41

Overview of important parameters (circuit breaker switching cycle)

Parameter
s

Description

p6710

Lower circuit breaker switching alarm threshold

p6711

Upper circuit breaker switching alarm threshold

p6712

Switch weighting factor for switching cycles under load

p6713

Circuit breaker switching cycles, total

p67141)

Circuit breaker switching cycles, without current

p67151)

Circuit breaker switching cycles under load

1)

May only be changed at access level 3

Signaling
Table 6-42

Signaling number of switching actuations

Alarm message

Description

A07322

Advance warning of number of switching actuations

A07323

Number of switching actuations in the critical range

6.6

Hardware-related optional functions

6.6.1

Redundancy mode

6.6.1.1

Control Unit redundancy mode

Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite failure of a Control
Unit (CU320).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

285

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

GM 150 -1

$/6

&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU

7UDQVI

$/6

6
*5

GM 150 -2

:5

:5

*5

7UDQVI

&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU

&%
FRQWURO

3UHFKDUJH

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

3XOOZLUH

PSA 1

PSA 2

+%2Q

I/O

X101

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 15

X102

C U 32 0-2

X100
C U 32 0-1

X100

TM 15

X103
TM 15

L 52

&%
FRQWURO

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

+%2Q

I/O

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

3UHFKDUJH

X101

X103

PB

PB

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31

U DC,

VWDWH

TM 15

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

TM 15

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 31

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH

X102

L 52

TM 15

,QWHUUXSWV

PB
3/&

Figure 6-46

286

Power unit redundancy mode

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

Characteristics
Redundancy for up to 2 Control Units (GM150, CU320)
Redundancy mode may be selected using parameter (p7004)
Redundancy mode may be selected via binector input (p7006)
The active DRIVE-CLIQ ports are readable via r109

Prerequisites
Functionality available with order number 6SL3835-2LN43-6AR00.
Maximum 2 Control Units.
Minimum firmware release 2.5.
PLC and configuration required.

Integration into the system


Master-slave configuration
CU 320 - 1: P7004 = Master
CU 320 - 2: P7004 = Slave

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

287

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

0DVWHU

6ODYH
3

GM 150 -1

$/6

&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU

7UDQVI

$/6

6
*5

GM 150 -2

:5

:5

*5

7UDQVI

&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU

&%
FRQWURO

3UHFKDUJH

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

3XOOZLUH

PSA 1

PSA 2

+%2Q

I/O

TM 15

X103
TM 15

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 15

C U 32 0-2

X102

X100
C U 32 0-1

X100
X101

L 52

&%
FRQWURO

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

+%2Q

I/O

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

3UHFKDUJH

X101
X102
X103

PB

PB

L 52

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31

U DC,

VWDWH

TM 15

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

TM 15

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 31

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH

TM 15

,QWHUUXSWV

PB
3/&

Figure 6-47

Master-slave configuration

Stand-Alone or Emergency Mode configuration


CU 320 - 1: P7004 = Stand-Alone

288

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
CU 320 - 2: P7004 = Stand-Alone
M

'ULYH

'ULYH
3

GM 150 -1

$/6

&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU

7UDQVI

$/6

6
*5

GM 150 -2

:5

:5

*5

7UDQVI

&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU

&%
FRQWURO

3UHFKDUJH

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

X20 0
X20 1
X20 2

3XOOZLUH

PSA 1

PSA 2

+%2Q

I/O

TM 15

X103
TM 15

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 15

C U 32 0-2

X102

X100

C U 32 0-1

X100
X101

L 52

&%
FRQWURO

36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU

+%2Q

I/O

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

3UHFKDUJH

X101
X102
X103

PB

PB

L 52

VWDWH

5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW

TM 15

7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH

TM 31

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH

TM 15

,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31

U DC,

TM 15

,QWHUUXSWV

PB
3/&

Figure 6-48

Stand-Alone or Emergency Mode configuration

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

289

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

6.6.1.2

Power unit redundancy mode

Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite the failure of one
power unit connected in parallel. The DRIVE-CLiQ cables must be connected radially so that
the failed power unit can be replaced. It may be necessary to use a DRIVE-CLiQ HUB
Module (DMC20). The failed power unit must be deactivated via p0125 or via the binector
input p0895, before it is removed. When a replacement power unit has been installed it must
be activated accordingly.

Characteristics
Redundancy for up to 3 power units.
Power unit can be de-activated via parameter (p0125)
Power unit can be de-activated via binector input (p0895).

Prerequisites
Maximum number of parallel power units is 3.
Minimum firmware release 2.5.
Parallel connection of power units with suitable power reserves.

Integration into the system


The boot function with partial topologies is integrated in the system as follows.
p0125 Activate/de-activate power unit component
r0126 Power unit component active/inactive
p0895 BI: Activate/deactivate power unit component

6.6.2

Parallel circuit configuration

Description
Switching power units in parallel is a simple method of extending the power spectrum of
drives beyond the power of the individual power units.

Characteristics
The converter supports the parallel connection of power units on the motor side in order to
extend the power spectrum.
The main features of parallel circuits are:
Parallel circuits with up to three power units on one motor with separate winding systems.

290

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Simple commissioning because no special parameterization is necessary. Only the MLFB
number of the converter is relevant.
The power units connected in parallel must be connected to the same CU.
Individual power units can be diagnosed (troubleshooting) via p7100 ff.

Startup
During commissioning, power units connected in parallel are treated like a power unit on the
motor side. With parallel connection, the parameter display for the actual values changes
only slightly. Instead, suitable "total values" are derived from the individual values for the
power units.
In STARTER, parallel connection of the motor module is activated via the Wizard. You can
also select parallel connection when choosing the power unit.

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-43

6.6.3

Overview of important parameters (parallel circuits)

Parameters

Description

p0120

Power unit data set (PDS) number

p0121

Power unit component number

r7000

Parallel circuit configuration, number of active power units

r7001

Parallel circuit configuration, enable power units

r7002

Parallel circuit configuration, power unit status

p7003

Parallel circuit configuration, winding system

p7010

Parallel circuit configuration, current asymmetry alarm threshold

p7011

Parallel circuit configuration, DC link voltage asymmetry alarm threshold

p7222-p7229

Actual current values

p7230-p7235

DC link voltage actual values

Brake controller

Description
The brake controller enables regenerative operation of an electric machine.
The following points should be noted when commissioning the brake controller:
Check whether p6822.0 is nonzero. If so, enter the brake controller resistance (p6811)
and finish commissioning.
Check that p6816 is connected to r0082.0
Check that p6826 = 0.
Check that p6814 is connected to p6813

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

291

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
If Vdc max control is enabled for the machine (p1240 = 1) check that p6813 is at least 3
% smaller than p1241
Test mode can be activated using p6650 = 30.
An actuation signal (positive edge on p6651) starts pre-charging. On reaching the DC
link voltage setpoint, the brake controller synchronizes with the modulation ranges
specified in p6815.0 /.1. The falling partial DC link voltages (r0070.1 /.2) can be
recorded and checked using the starter trace.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


9798 Auxiliary circuits - brake controller

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-44
Parameter
s

6.6.4

Overview of important parameters (brake controller)


Description

p6811

Brake controller brake resistance

p6812

Brake controller switching frequency

p6813

Brake controller voltage setpoint, fixed value

p6814

Brake controller voltage setpoint connector input (default: p6814 = p6813)

p6815

Brake controller modulation, test

p6816

Brake controller, pre-control power, connector input

p6817

Brake controller, proportional gain controller Kp

p6818

Brake controller, integral time controller Tn

p6819

Brake controller, DC link voltage actual value smoothing time

p6820

Brake controller, pre-control power smoothing time

p6821

Brake controller, connector input enable signals

r6822

Brake controller status word

r6823

Brake controller, modulation range display

p6824

Brake controller, power display

p6825

Brake controller, brake resistance temperature protection connector input

p6826

Brake controller, pre-control power difference, connector input

p6827

Brake controller, power unit temperature model connector output

Recooling unit

Characteristics
Control and monitoring functions of a recooling unit
Automatically activated when using water-cooled power units

292

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Evaluation of a leakage water sensor (p0266.4)
Evaluation of a water flow sensor (p0266.5, p0260, p0263)
Evaluation of a conductivity sensor (p0266.6, p0266.7, p0261, p0262, p268, p269, p270)
Monitoring the water intake temperature using internal temperature sensors (p6299)
Parameterizable ramp-down time (p264)
Recooling unit test mode (p6650, p6651)

Description
A recooling unit (RKA) is responsible for cooling and (non-) conductivity in the de-ionized
water cooling circuit of a water-cooled power unit. The unit is controlled and monitored by a
PLC which is part of the recooling unit. The "recooling unit" function module described here
forms an interface between the closed-loop control and the external control (open-loop)
(PLC) of the recooling unit. The recooling unit is controlled via terminals (e.g. Control Unit,
TM31).
Conductivity may be monitored via a sensor which provides an analog signal which is read
by the PSA (presetting) or by a sensor which provides two digital signals (conductivity alarm
threshold/fault threshold exceeded) which are read by the TM or CU via BICO connections.
When evaluating the analog value, the recooling unit function module constantly monitors
the conductivity of the de-ionized water. If the alarm threshold is exceeded, the module
automatically switches the recooling unit on and switches it off again when the level has
fallen below the alarm threshold by one hysteresis value.
The de-ionized water intake temperature is monitored constantly.
If it falls below a fixed value of 5C, the recooling unit switches on automatically to
prevent the water from freezing. It does not switch off until the temperature has risen
above a fixed value of 7C.
An OFF2 is generated if it exceeds the fault threshold 1 value (hardware description
data). However, the recooling unit does not switch off until the temperature has fallen
below the fault threshold by a fixed hysteresis value of 2K.
If it exceeds the value for fault threshold 2 (fault threshold 1 + 2K), the recooling unit is
switched off immediately.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299).
The fault triggered when evaluating a leakage can be re-parameterized into an alarm signal.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

293

Figure 6-49

294

5.(2Q
U

U U 

62SHUDWLRQ


5.(:DWHUIORZ2.
U
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ
U

5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U

S

S

S

U 

6)DXOW

5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW
U

S

5.(1ROHDNDJH U

5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U
5.(1RIDXOW U

U

5.(:DWHUIORZ2.

5.$1ROHDNDJH U

5.(1RIDXOW
U
5.(1ROHDNDJH
U

U U 

6:DLWIRU
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW

5.$1RIDXOW U

5.$2Q U

5.(:DWHUIORZ2. U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW U

U

5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW

U U 

6:DLWIRU
SRZHUXSIHHGEDFNVLJQDOV

5.(2Q
U

5.(1ROHDNDJH
U

5.(1RIDXOW
U

5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U

5.($FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
U

5.(:DWHUIORZ2. U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW U

S

U U 

65HDG\WRSRZHUXS

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

Sequence control recooling unit

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


9794 Recooling unit, control and feedback signals
9795 Recooling unit sequence control

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-45

6.6.5

Overview of important parameters (recooling unit)

Parameters

Description

r0046.07

Missing enable signals - recooling unit ready missing

p0260

Recooling unit ramp-up time 1

p0261

Recooling unit ramp-up time 2

p0262

Recooling unit fault conductivity delay time

p0263

Recooling unit fault water flow delay time

p0264

Recooling unit ramp-down time

r0265

BO: Recooling unit control word

p0266[0...7]

BI: Recooling unit signal source feedback signals

r0267

BO: Recooling unit status word display

r0268

Recooling unit coolant conductivity actual value

p0269

Recooling unit coolant conductivity thresholds

p0270

Recooling unit conductivity status word

p6299

Power unit cooling input temperature alarm threshold

p6650

Activate test mode infeed

p6651

Activate/deactivate motor test mode signal source

Fan control

Characteristics
Fan control and monitoring functions
Automatically activated when using air-cooled power units.
Option of two fan classes: Main fan and redundant main fan.
Optional evaluation of one motor protection switch per fan class (p6798, p6799).
Optional evaluation of one speed monitoring system per fan class (p6798, p6799).
Optional monitoring of pressure differential (presetting) with maximum of two pressure
differential sensors. (p6790, p6791, ...p6796, p6801).
Operating hours counter for main fan and redundant main fan (p251, p252).
Monitoring of intake air temperature using internal temperature sensors (p6299).
Parameterizable ramp-down time (p6797).

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

295

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Separate test mode for main fan and redundant main fan (p6650, p6651) without rampdown time.

Description
The fans are responsible for cooling an air-cooled power unit. They are actuated via
terminals (e.g. Control Unit, TM31). The fan control function module actuates the fans and
monitors the feedback signals.
The fan monitoring configuration uses a configuration word in the hardware description data
which can be read using the IBS tool (p6802).
The fans are normally monitored by one or two pressure differential sensors. The pressure
differential is monitored statically for fault and alarm thresholds and dynamically for changes
in pressure differential.
Slow changes in pressure differential are also monitored to provide advance warning of
pollution of the filter mats.
The actual differential pressure values are also monitored to detect wire breakage.
All threshold values are preset via hardware description data and may be adjusted via
Commissioning - Tools (Starter, Scout, OP) .
The fan motor protection switch and/or fan speed may also be monitored as an option. If
pressure differential monitoring is active, only one alarm is generated when these feedback
signals are missing. If there is no pressure differential monitoring, a fault is generated if fan
feedback signals are missing.
The redundant fan is automatically activated if a redundant fan is configured and the
pressure differential alarm threshold is not reached on starting the main fan, or the alarm
threshold is not reached during operation, or feedback signals from the fan speed monitoring
system or motor protection switches are missing. An alarm signal will be generated.
In order to guarantee availability, the redundant fan will be switched on for a set period at
regular intervals during operation of the main fan. The frequency of duration of operation are
specified in the hardware description data. No alarm signal is given during this cyclical
operation.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299) and a fault
threshold (hardware description data).

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


9805 Fan sequence control

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-46
Parameters

296

Overview of important parameters (fan monitoring)


Description

p0251

Power unit main fan operating hours counter

p0252

Power unit main fan maximum service life

p6299

Power unit cooling input temperature alarm threshold

p6650

Activate test mode infeed

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameters

6.6.6

Description

p6651

Activate/deactivate motor test mode signal source

p6790

Main fan nominal pressure differential threshold

p6791

Main fan minimum pressure differential threshold

p6792

Main fan minimum pressure differential change on switching

p6793

Main fan minimum pressure differential change on fan failure

p6794

Main fan monitoring time on switching

p6795

Main fan pressure differential actual value smoothing time

p6796

Main fan pressure differential tolerance

p6797

Main fan ramp-down time

p6798

Main fan status word signal source

p6799

Main fan status word display

p6800

Main fan control word

p6801

Main fan pressure differential actual value

p6802

Main fan configuration display

Ancillary fan monitoring

Description
The ancillary fans are responsible for cooling the control cabinet and for additional cooling of
the rectifier cabinet, the inverter cabinet and the braking controller cabinet.
The function module monitors the fans while they are running. As no hardware configuration
word is defined, unassigned binary feedback signals must be permanently set to high.
(X222.8, X222.5, X222.4 or X222.1 to 24V or PSA simulation mode).
Monitoring is activated
by feedback from the fan contactor or
by a report from the PSA that the high-speed grounding switch has been triggered.
When the fans are being monitored via the motor protection switch, the binary input for the
fan protection feedback must be set permanently high (X221.4 to24V or PSA simulation
mode).
Ancillary fans that are in test mode can be switched on and off from the function module via
the PSA.

Characteristics
The ancillary fans are monitored irrespective of the type of cooling.
The ancillary fans are switched on by the PT100 evaluator or the PSA if the high-speed
grounding switch has been triggered.
Up to four fan speed or motor protection switch reports from the ancillary fan (control
cabinet, rectifier, inverter and brake chopper) are monitored via digital inputs on the PSA.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

297

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules
One digital input on the PSA is monitored for overheating fault reports from the PT100
evaluator.
One digital input on the PSA is for fan contactor feedback from the PT100 evaluator to
activate fan speed monitoring.
A function test can be performed on the ancillary fans by doing a test run.

Function diagrams
None

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-47

Overview of important parameters (monitoring the ancillary fans)

Parameter
s

Description

p6650

Activation test mode power supply

p6651

Signal source for switching motor test mode on/off

6.7

Function modules

6.7.1

Function modules

Description
A function module is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated during
commissioning.

Examples of function modules


Technology controller
Extended monitoring functions
A function module generally has separate parameters and, in some cases, separate faults
and warnings too. These parameters and messages are only displayed when the function
module is active. An active function module also generally requires additional processing
time, which must be taken into account during configuration.

298

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules

Commissioning with STARTER


In the commissioning screen forms of STARTER, you can either directly or indirectly activate
the function modules (e.g. technology controller direct, linear motor indirect by selecting a
linear motor).

Commissioning via parameter (only with BOP20)


The function modules can be activated/de-activated using parameter p0108 of the Control
Unit (CU). The indices of parameters r0107, p0108 and p0124 represent the different drive
object types; these are displayed in r0107 (CU) after the device has been configured. The
READY LED of the main component of the drive object (e.g. Motor Module, TM31) can be
made to flash using parameter p0124 (CU).

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-48

Overview of important parameters (function modules)

Parameter
s

Description

r0107

Drive object type

p0108

Drive object, function module

p0124

Identifying the main components using LEDs

6.7.2

Technology controller

6.7.2.1

Description/Commissioning

Description
The technology controller is designed as a PID controller,
whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual
value channel (factory setting).
The P, I, and D components can be set separately. A value of 0 deactivates the
corresponding component.
Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs. The setpoints can be scaled via
parameters (p2255 and p2256). A ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel can be
used to set the setpoint ramp-up/ramp-down time via parameters p2257 and p2258. The
setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element. The smoothing time
can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265.
The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints (p2201 to p2215), the
motorized potentiometer, or via the field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS).
Pre-control can be integrated via a connector input.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

299

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules
The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed. It can
be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a
connector output (r2294).
The actual value can be integrated, for example, via an analog input on the TB30.
If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons, the D component is switched to the
setpoint/actual value difference (p2263 = 1) unlike in the factory setting. This is always
necessary when the D component is to be effective, even if the reference variable changes.
The D component can only be activated when p2274 > 0.

Characteristics
Simple control functions can be implemented with the technology controller, e.g.:
Level control
Temperature control
Dancer position control
Pressure control
Flow control
Simple closed-loop control without higher-level controller
Tension control
The technology controller features:
Two scalable setpoints
Scalable output signal
Separate fixed values
Separate motorized potentiometer
The output limits can be activated and deactivated via the ramp-function generator.
The D component can be switched to the control deviation or actual value channel.
The motorized potentiometer of the technology controller is only active when the drive
pulses are enabled.

Commissioning with STARTER


The "technology controller" function module can be activated via the commissioning Wizard
or the drive configuration (configure DDS).
You can check the actual configuration in parameter r0108.16.

6.7.2.2

Examples

Fill level control


The objective here is to maintain a constant level in the container.

300

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules
This is carried out by means of a variable-speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for
measuring the level.
The level is determined via an analog input (e.g. AI0 on TB30) and sent to the technology
controller. The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint. The resulting controlled variable is
used as the setpoint for the speed controller.
6HQVRU

; DFW

Figure 6-50

Liquid level control: application


7HFBUHJ.S
S

;6HW

5DPSIXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU

7HFBUHJ
6HWSRLQW
S

Figure 6-51

QBVHW
S




 7HFBUHJW\SH
S

;$FW
$FWXDOYDOXH
S

7HFBUHJ7Q
S

G
GW

Liquid level control - control structure

Important parameters (see List Manual)


Table 6-49

Important parameters (liquid level control)

Paramete Description
rs

Example

p1155

n_setp1 downstream of RFG

p1155 = r2294 Tec_ctrl output_sig [FP 3080]

p2200

BI: Technology controller enable

p2200 = 1 Technology controller enabled

p2253

CI: Technology controller setpoint 1

p2253 = r2224 Fixed setpoint active [FP 7950]

p2263

Technology controller type

p2263 = 1 D component in fault signal [FP


7958]

p2264

CI: Technology controller actual value


(XIST)

p2264 = r4055 [1] Analog input AI1 of TB30

p2280

Technology controller p-gain

p2280 Determine by optimization

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

301

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules

6.7.2.3

Paramete Description
rs

Example

p2285

p2285 Determine by optimization

Technology controller integral action


time

Integration of the technology controller


The technology controller function is integrated in the system as follows.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


7950 Fixed values (r0108.16 = 1)
7954 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)
7958 Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1)

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-50
Parameters

Overview of key parameters (integration of technology controller)


Description
Fixed setpoints

p2201[0..n]
...
p2215[0..n]

CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1


...
CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15

p2220[0..n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0

p2221[0..n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1

p2222[0..n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2

p2223[0..n]

BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3


Motorized potentiometer

p2230[0..n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration

p2235[0..n]

BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, raise setpoint

p2236[0..n]

BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint

p2237[0..n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value

p2238[0..n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value

p2240[0..n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value

r2245

CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint before RFG

p2247[0..n]

Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time

p2248[0..n]

Technology controller motor potentiometer ramp-down time

r2250 CO:

Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG


Closed-loop control

302

p2200

BI: Technology controller enable

p2253[0..n]

CI: Technology controller setpoint 1

p2254 [0..n]

CI: Technology controller setpoint 2

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameters

Description

p2255

Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling

p2256

Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling

p2257

Technology controller ramp-up time

p2258

Technology controller ramp-down time

p2261

Technology controller setpoint filter time constant

p2263

Technology controller type

p2264[0..n]

CI: Technology controller actual value

p2265

Technology controller actual value filter time constant

p2280

Technology controller proportional amplification

p2285

Technology controller integral action time

p2289[0..n]

CI: Technology controller pre-control signal

p2295

Technology controller output scaling

6.7.3

Extended monitoring functions

6.7.3.1

Characteristics/Commissioning

Characteristics
When the extension is activate, the monitoring functions are extended as follows:
Speed setpoint monitoring: |n_setp| p2161
Speed setpoint monitoring: n_set > 0
Load monitoring

Description of load monitoring


This function monitors power transmission between the motor and the working machine.
Typical applications include V-belts, flat belts, or chains that loop around the belt pulleys or
cog wheels for drive and outgoing shafts and transfer the peripheral speeds and forces.
Load monitoring can be used here to identify blockages in the working machine and
interruptions to the power transmission.
During load monitoring, the current speed/torque curve is compared with the programmed
speed/torque curve (p2182 to p2190). If the current value is outside the programmed
tolerance bandwidth, a fault or alarm is triggered depending on parameter p2181. The fault
or alarm message can be delayed by means of parameter p2192 to prevent false alarms
caused by brief transitional states.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

303

Start

Functions
6.7 Function modules
S

7RUTXH>1P@
S
S

S

7RUTXH
DFWXDOYDOXH

S
S
S

S

S

S

U 
%LW 

$
S

Figure 6-52

6SHHG 
USP

S

Load monitoring

Commissioning
The extended monitoring functions are activated while the commissioning Wizard is running.
Parameter r0108.17 indicates whether it has been activated.

6.7.3.2

Integration

Description
The extended monitoring functions are integrated in the system as follows.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


8010 Speed messages
8013 Load monitoring

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-51
Parameter
s

Overview of important parameters (extended monitoring functions)


Description
Load monitoring

p2181[D]

304

Load monitoring, response

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Parameter
s

Description

p2182[D]

Load monitoring, speed threshold 1

p2183[D]

Load monitoring, speed threshold 2

p2184[D]

Load monitoring, speed threshold 3

p2185[D]
...
p2190[D]

Load torque monitoring torque threshold 1 top


...
Load torque monitoring torque threshold 3 bottom

p2192[D]

Load monitoring, delay time

p2150[D]

Hysteresis speed 3

p2151[C]

CI: Speed setpoint

p2161[D]

Speed threshold 3

r2198.4

BO: ZSW monitoring 2, |n_setp| p2161

r2198.5

BO: ZSW monitoring 2, n_setp < 0

Speed setpoint monitoring

6.8

Extended diagnostic functions

6.8.1

Description
Every Powerstack has eight 12-bit D/A converters on it that represent the input range 0x000
to 0xFFF as 0 to 10 V. The outputs can be tapped at terminals X231 and X232:
Output 0: X231.15 to ground X231.16
Output 1: X231.14 to ground X231.13
Output 2: X231.11 to ground X231.12
Output 3: X231.10 to ground X231.9
Output 4: X232.15 to ground X232.16
Output 5: X232.14 to ground X232.13
Output 6: X232.11 to ground X232.12
Output 7: X232.10 to ground X232.9
The variables can be recorded with ordinary commercial analog recorder. Since the analog
outputs are recorded in the 500s grid, the recorder should have a scanning frequency of at
least 2kHz. Otherwise scanning errors may occur.

Selection of signals
The sources of the signals should be set in parameters p6840[PDS] to p6847 [PDS] (access
level 3). The starter suggests a suitable selection list for each input. The 0% and 100%
values can also be set to calibrate the recorder. This allows the recorder offset and scaling to
be checked.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

305

Start

Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
If the converter has a number of power stacks, parameters p6840 to p6847 are declared.
Each additional powerstack thus provides 8 new analog outputs.

Checking the signals:


The instantaneous values of the signals that have been set can be checked in parameters
p6880[PDS] to p6887[PDS].

Offset and scaling


Floating point signals are automatically standardized by the Bico function. The reference
values are stored in parameters p2000 to p2004. Further information on the standardization
of Bico parameters is given in the "Parameterizing/addressing" section under the heading
"BICO technology: interconnection / standardization of signals".
Example: p6840[0] = r63 (actual speed), P2000 = 3000 rpm, P6856[0] = 1.0
10V corresponds to 3000 rpm
0V corresponds to -3000 rpm
If the mapping range is changed, the offset (P6870[PDS] to P6877[PDS]) and scaling factor
(P6860[PDS] to P6867[PDS]) must be changed accordingly. This results in the following
mapping range:
8>9@


6FDOLQJIDFWRU
6LJQDOYDOXH
2IIVHW

Figure 6-53

Mapping of the diagnostic analog outputs

Signals for the analog outputs


Table 6-52

List of signals for analog outputs


Signal

Parameter

Unit

Scaling
(100 % = ...)

Speed setpoint before the setpoint


filter

r0060

rpm

p2000

Speed actual value motor encoder

r0061

rpm

p2000

306

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Signal
Speed actual value

Parameter
r0063

Unit
rpm

Scaling
(100 % = ...)
p2000

Drive output frequency

r0066

Hz

P2000 / 60

Absolute current actual value

r0068

Arms

p2002

Actual DC link voltage value

r0070

p2001

Total torque setpoint

r0079

Nm

p2003

Actual active power

r0082

kW

r2004

Control deviation

r0064

rpm

p2000

Modulation depth

r0074

100% max. output level

Current setpoint, torque-generating

r0077

p2002

Current actual value, torquegenerating

r0078

p2002

Flux setpoint

r0083

100% rated flux

Flux actual value

r0084

100% rated flux

Speed controller
PI torque output

r1480

Nm

p2003

Speed controller
I torque output

r1482

Nm

p2003

Bit fields and integer values


Bit fields are associated bitwise with the AND mask (P6850[PDS] to P6857[PDS]). The value
1 is only displayed if all the bits in the bit field that are selected by the AND mask are set.
Otherwise the value is 0. The signal is then modified like a floating point signal with the offset
and scaling factor and is output.
The AND mask must be set to zero to output integer values. The scaling factor should be set
to the inverse value of the desired mapping area.
Example: If the lower 8 bits of an integer value are output, the factor must be set to "2-8" =
1/256 = 0.00390625. Then value 0xff receives the 10V and 0x00 receives the 5V.

6.8.2

Integration

Description
The extended diagnostic functions are integrated in the system as follows.

Function diagram overview (see List Manual)


9976 - Power Stack Adapter (PSA) - Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 7)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

307

Start

Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions

Overview of important parameters (refer to the List Manual)


Table 6-53

308

Overview of important parameters (extended diagnostic functions)

Parameters

Description

p6840[PDS] to p6847[PDS]

Input signals 0-7

p6850[PDS] to p6857[PDS]

AND mask for word/short/byte signals 0-7

p6860[PDS] to p6867[PDS]

Scaling factor for signals 0-7

p6870[PDS] to p6877[PDS]

Offset for signals 0-7

p6880[PDS] to p6887[PDS]

Instantaneous value for signals 0-7

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.1

Further information on alarms, error and system messages


A detailed summary and detailed information on alarms, error and system messages for your
converter can be found in the Sinamics List Manual.

7.2

External alarms and faults

Key parameterizable fault and system messages


With the terminal blocks TM15/TM31, there are 24 terminals. With the starter, a selection
can be made of any signals that are supposed to be displayed or which protective devices
are supposed to be triggered. The list of parameterized faults and alarms can be found in the
list manual in the "faults and alarms" section.

7.3

Message from the grounding switch

Switching statuses "MPGS safe ON" and "MPGS safe OFF".


The switching status of the make-proof grounding switch is indicated to the sequencer (D435
or CU320) by the messages "MPGS safe ON" and "MPGS safe OFF" via a TM15 module.
These messages are required for displaying the status and for interlocking the circuit
breaker.

Enabling the converter


The doors for the circuit breaker are unlocked by means of a serial link between the "Safe
ON messages" from the floating contacts of the make-proof grounding switch and the
enabling signal from the open-loop/closed-loop control.
The enabling signal from the open-loop/closed-loop control is reported when an insulating
resistor sets itself near 0 after the converter has been grounded or when the signal "Status
fault ground fault monitoring (stator)" has tripped.
This concept ensures a high degree of protection against residual voltages.
When you switch on the converter, make sure that:

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

309

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
The doors are closed.
The make-proof grounding switch is open.
The insulation resistance is in a normal range.
If these conditions are fulfilled, you can start the converter.

Insulation monitoring
The insulation monitor IRDH275-635 (Bender) has an external reset input. This input is
interconnected in such a way that the error messages are automatically acknowledged at the
insulation monitoring device.
If the converter ground is removed, the insulation resistance changes from short circuit to the
system-specific setpoint.
The error message is acknowledged.

7.4

Diagnostics

7.4.1

Introduction

Description
This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures
you need to take to rectify them.

Note
If errors or malfunctions occur in the cabinet unit, you must carefully check the possible
causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them. If you cannot identify the cause of the
problem or you discover that components are defective, your regional office or sales office
should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail.

7.4.2

Diagnostics via LEDs

CU320 Control Unit (-A10)


Table 7-1
LED

310

Description of the LEDs on the CU320


Color

State

Description

---

OFF

Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance


range

Green

Continuously lit

The component is ready for operation and cyclic


DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
LED

Color

State

Description

2 Hz flashing light

Writing to CompactFlash card.

Continuously lit

At least one fault is present in this component.

0.5 Hz
flashing light

CompactFlash Card is not inserted.

Green
Red

0.5 Hz
flashing light

Control Unit 320 is ready for operation.


No software licenses for device.

Orange

Continuously lit

DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.

0.5 Hz
flashing light

Unable to load firmware to RAM.

2 Hz flashing light

Firmware CRC error

OFF

Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.

RDY
(ready)

Red

---

Boot error (e.g. firmware cannot be loaded to RAM).

Note:
PROFIBUS is ready for communication when the
Control Unit is ready (see LED RDY).

DP1
(PROFIBUS cyclic
operation)

Green

Continuously lit

Cyclic communication is taking place.

0.5 Hz
flashing light

Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place.


Possible causes:
The master is not transmitting setpoints.
No global control (GC) or master sign-of-life is
transmitted during isochronous operation.

Red

Continuously lit

Cyclic communication has been interrupted.

---

OFF

Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance


range.
The component is not ready for operation.
The Option Board is missing or an associated drive
object has not been created.

Green

Continuously lit

Option board is ready.

0.5 Hz
flashing light

Depends on the Option Board used.

Red

Continuously lit

At least one fault is pending in this component.


The Option Board is not ready (e.g., after switching
on).

---

OFF

Reserved

Green

Continuously lit

Reserved

OPT
(option)

MOD

Customer Terminal Block TM31 (-A60)


Table 7-2
LED

READY

Description of the LEDs


Color

State

Description

---

OFF

Electronics power supply outside the permissible


tolerance range

Green

Continuously lit

Customer terminal block ready for operation

Red

Continuously lit

Fault present

[ID 5174]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

311

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics

7.4.3

Diagnostics via parameters

Diagnostic parameters for the device status


r0002

Drive status

Display of drive status

r0046

Missing enable signals


(Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the drive control from being commissioned.)

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

OFF1 enable missing

No

Yes

01

OFF2 enable missing

No

Yes

02

OFF3 enable missing

No

Yes

03

Enable run missing

No

Yes

05

External power-on inhibit active

No

Yes

06

Commissioning not yet complete

No

Yes

09

Infeed enable missing

No

Yes

10

Ramp-function generator enable missing

No

Yes

11t

No start ramp-function generator

No

Yes

12t

No setpoint enable

No

Yes

16

OFF1 enable internal missing

No

Yes

17

OFF2 enable internal missing

No

Yes

18

OFF3 enable internal missing

No

Yes

26

Drive inactive or not operational

No

Yes

r0050

Active command data set (CDS)


(Displays the active command data set (Command Data Set, CDS).)

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

CDS effective, bit 0

No

Yes

01

CDS effective, bit 1

No

Yes

02

CDS effective, bit 2

No

Yes

03

CDS effective, bit 3

No

Yes

See also p0810, p0811, p0812, p0813, r0836 (List Manual)


The command data set selected via binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813 is displayed via r0836.

Diagnostic parameters for digital inputs/outputs


r0721

CU digital inputs terminal actual value


(Displays the actual value on the digital inputs)

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

DI 0 (X122.1)

Low

High

312

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
r0721

CU digital inputs terminal actual value


(Displays the actual value on the digital inputs)

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

01

DI 1 (X122.2)

Low

High

02

DI 2 (X122.3)

Low

High

03

DI 3 (X122.4)

Low

High

04

DI 4 (X132.1)

Low

High

05

DI 5 (X132.2)

Low

High

06

DI 6 (X132.3)

Low

High

07

DI 7 (X132.4)

Low

High

08

DI/DO 8 (X122.7)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X122.8)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X122.10)

Low

High

11

DI/DO 11 (X122.11)

Low

High

12

DI/DO 12 (X132.7)

Low

High

13

DI/DO 13 (X132.8)

Low

High

14

DI/DO 14 (X132.10)

Low

High

15

DI/DO 15 (X132.11)

Low

High

If a DI/DO is parameterized as an output (p0728.x = 1), r0721.x = 0 is displayed.


DI: digital input
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

r0747

CU digital outputs status


(Displays the status of the digital outputs)

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

08

DI/DO 8 (X122.7)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X122.8)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X122.10)

Low

High

11

DI/DO 11 (X122.11)

Low

High

12

DI/DO 12 (X132.7)

Low

High

13

DI/DO 13 (X132.8)

Low

High

14

DI/DO 14 (X132.10)

Low

High

15

DI/DO 15 (X132.11)

Low

High

Inversion via p0748 is taken into account.


It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p0728).
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

r4022

TM31 digital inputs status


(Displays the status of the digital inputs on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

DI 0 (X520.1)

Low

High

01

DI 1 (X520.2)

Low

High

02

DI 2 (X520.3)

Low

High

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

313

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
r4022

TM31 digital inputs status


(Displays the status of the digital inputs on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

03

DI 3 (X520.4)

Low

High

04

DI 4 (X530.1)

Low

High

05

DI 5 (X530.2)

Low

High

06

DI 6 (X530.3)

Low

High

07

DI 7 (X530.4)

Low

High

08

DI/DO 8 (X541.2)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X541.3)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X541.4)

Low

High

11

DI/DO 11 (X541.5)

Low

High

DI: Digital input


DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

r4047

TM31 digital outputs status


(Displays the status of the digital outputs on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

DO 0 (X542.1 - 3)

Low

High

01

DO 1 (X542.4 - 6)

Low

High

08

DI/DO 8 (X541.2)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X541.3)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X541.4)

Low

High

11

DI/DO 11 (X541.5)

Low

High

Inversion via p4048 is taken into account.


It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p4028).
DI/DO: Digital output
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

r4022

TM15 digital inputs status


(Displays the status of the digital inputs on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

DI/DO 0 (X520.2)

Low

High

01

DI/DO 1 (X520.3)

Low

High

02

DI/DO 2 (X520.4)

Low

High

03

DI/DO 3 (X520.5)

Low

High

04

DI/DO 4 (X520.6)

Low

High

05

DI/DO 5 (X520.7)

Low

High

06

DI/DO 6 (X520.8)

Low

High

07

DI/DO 7 (X520.9)

Low

High

08

DI/DO 8 (X521.2)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X521.3)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X521.4)

Low

High

314

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
r4022

TM15 digital inputs status


(Displays the status of the digital inputs on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

11

DI/DO 11 (X521.5)

Low

High

12

DI/DO 12 (X521.6)

Low

High

13

DI/DO 13 (X521.7)

Low

High

14

DI/DO 14 (X521.8)

Low

High

15

DI/DO 15 (X521.9)

Low

High

16

DI/DO 16 (X522.2)

Low

High

17

DI/DO 17 (X522.3)

Low

High

18

DI/DO 18 (X522.4)

Low

High

19

DI/DO 19 (X522.5)

Low

High

20

DI/DO 20 (X522.6)

Low

High

21

DI/DO 21 (X522.7)

Low

High

22

DI/DO 22 (X522.8)

Low

High

23

DI/DO 23 (X522.9)

Low

High

DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

r4047

TM15 digital outputs status


(Displays the status of the digital outputs on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

00

DI/DO 0 (X520.2)

Low

High

01

DI/DO 1 (X520.3)

Low

High

02

DI/DO 2 (X520.4)

Low

High

03

DI/DO 3 (X520.5)

Low

High

04

DI/DO 4 (X520.6)

Low

High

05

DI/DO 5 (X520.7)

Low

High

06

DI/DO 6 (X520.8)

Low

High

07

DI/DO 7 (X520.9)

Low

High

08

DI/DO 8 (X521.2)

Low

High

09

DI/DO 9 (X521.3)

Low

High

10

DI/DO 10 (X521.4)

Low

High

11

DI/DO 11 (X521.5)

Low

High

12

DI/DO 12 (X521.6)

Low

High

13

DI/DO 13 (X521.7)

Low

High

14

DI/DO 14 (X521.8)

Low

High

15

DI/DO 15 (X521.9)

Low

High

16

DI/DO 16 (X522.2)

Low

High

17

DI/DO 17 (X522.3)

Low

High

18

DI/DO 18 (X522.4)

Low

High

19

DI/DO 19 (X522.5)

Low

High

20

DI/DO 20 (X522.6)

Low

High

21

DI/DO 21 (X522.7)

Low

High

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

315

Start

Alarm, error and system messages


7.4 Diagnostics
r4047

TM15 digital outputs status


(Displays the status of the digital outputs on the Terminal Module 15 (TM15))

Bit

Signal name

0-signal

1-signal

22

DI/DO 22 (X522.8)

Low

High

23

DI/DO 23 (X522.9)

Low

High

It does matter whether DI/DO is set as an input or output (p4028).


DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

7.4.4

Indicating and rectifying faults

Overview
The cabinet device has a number of protective functions that protect the converter from
damage in the event of a fault (faults and alarms).

Indicating faults and alarms


The converter indicates a fault by reporting the corresponding fault(s) and/or alarm(s) on the
cabinet device operator panel. Faults are indicated by the red "FAULT" LED and a fault
screen is automatically displayed. You can use the F1 Help function to call up information
about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it. You can use F5 Ack. to acknowledge a
stored fault.
Any alarms are displayed by the yellow flashing "Signal" LED. The system also displays a
note in the status bar of the operator panel, which provides information on the cause.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error occurred
and the time it was rectified. The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds
(r0969).

What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the converter indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.

What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the converter. It does not result in
the converter being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.

316

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.1

Troubleshooting/FAQs

Description
This chapter is intended to contain troubleshooting tips and FAQs and will be revised in each
new version of the document.

A.2

List of abbreviations

Summary
Table A-1

Meaning of the abbreviations and terminology

Abbreviation

Description

AC

AC voltage

AO

Analog Output

IM

Induction Motor

BI

Binector Input

BO

Binector Output

CDS

Command Data Set

CF card

CompactFlash card

CI

Connector Input

CU

Control Unit

CO

Connector Output

DC

DC voltage

DOxx

Digital Output

DO

Drive Object

ESD

Electrostatically Sensitive Devices

FBD

Function Block Diagram

Hz

Hertz

CB

Circuit-Breaker

FOC

Fiber Optic Cable

Motor

MLFB

Machine-readable product designation

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

317

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3

Abbreviation

Description

PG

Programming device

PSA

Power Stack Adapter

RAM

Random Access Memory

ROM

Read Only Memory

STW

Control word

TM

Terminal Module

VDC link

DC link voltage

VSM

Voltage Sensing Module

Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.1

BICO technology: Interconnecting signals

Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.

Binectors, BI: Binector Input, BO: Binector Output


A binector is a digital (binary) signal without a unit that can assume the value 0 or 1.
Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs (signal sink) and binector outputs (signal
source).
Table A-2

Binectors

Abbreviation and symbol

Name

Description

BI

Binector input

Can be interconnected to a binector output as


source.

Binector input
(signal sink)

318

The number of the binector output must be


entered as a parameter value.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Abbreviation and symbol

Name

Description

BO

Binector output

Can be used as a source for a binector input.

Binector output
(signal source)

Connectors, CI: Connector Input, CO: Connector Output


A connector is a digital signal, e.g. in 32-bit format. It can be used to depict words (16 bits),
double words (32 bits) or analog signals. Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs
(signal sink) and connector outputs (signal source).
The options for interconnecting connectors are restricted to ensuring that performance is not
adversely affected.
Table A-3

Connectors

Abbreviation and symbol

Name

Description

CI

Connector input

Can be interconnected to a connector output as


source.

Connector input

CO

(signal sink)

The number of the connector output must be


entered as a parameter value.

Connector output

Can be used as a source for a connector input.

Connector output
(signal source)

A.3.2

Information about the parameter nomenclature:

Structure of the parameter names


The parameter names of the listed parameters are composed as follows:
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short parameter name)
[signal name, if available]
The names have been adopted from the Sinamics GM150 List Manual in order to ensure a
unique assignment.
Details on the parameters listed here can be found in the List Manual on your CD.

Abbreviations for BICO parameters


The following abbreviations can be placed in front of the parameter name:
BI: Binector input
This parameter selects the source of a digital signal.
BO: Binector output

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

319

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection with
other parameters.
CI: Connector input
This parameter selects the source of an "analog" signal.
CO: Connector output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other parameters.
CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as both an "analog" and a digital signal for interconnection with
other parameters.

Identification of Terminal Modules according to their topology


Note
Nomenclature of Terminal Modules TM15/TM31
The Terminal Modules are identified (e.g., TM31_1) according to their arrangement in the
topology.
Note
Nomenclature of item codes
Item codes are distinguished by means of count variables according to their topology in the
relevant device.
For standardization of the item codes, the following applies: [=nHC-A11] where n = 1, 2, 3, 4,
etc.
Note
Nomenclature of the digital inputs and outputs (DI/DO)
The numbers of the digital inputs and outputs (DI/DO) correspond to the numbers in the
expert list.

A.3.3

Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV

Calling parameter macro PM001501


Parameter macro PM001501 is called by the autostart macro.

320

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

Overview
Table A-4

Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001501 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

608
[0]

CI:
Trafo temperature
signal source
(Trafotemp S_src)

B_INF
MV

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

4105

CO:
TM31 Temperature
evaluation, actual
value
(TM31 Temp actual)

TM31_1

X522.7 (+)
X522.8 (-)

CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swtch 0 ctrl sig) ["On"
command]

B_INFMV

Note:
Temperature
evaluation is
disabled in the
default setting. If a
temperature sensor
is connected, then
evaluation must be
enabled on TM31_1
via p4100.
728

738

CU:
Set input or output
(CU DI or DO)

CU_GM

=0xffff*

[DI/DO 8]
Set as output

X122.7/
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 9]

X122.8/

Set as output

[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 10]
Set as output

X122.10/
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 11]
Set as output

X122.11/
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 12]
Set as output

X132.7
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 13]
Set as output

X132.8
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 14]
Set as output

X132.10
[=.nHA-A11]

[DI/DO 15]
Set as output

X132.11
[=.nHA-A11]

BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 8
(CU S_src DI/DO 8)

CU_GM

[=.nHC-A51]

X122.7
[=.nHA-A11]

6660.0

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

321

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

739

BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 9
(CU S_src DI/DO 9)

CU_GM

X122.8

6660.1

CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig) ["Off"
command]

B_INFMV

[=.nHA-A11]

740

CU_GM
BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 10
(CU S_src DI/DO 10)

X122.10
[=.nHA-A11]

6660.2

CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig)
["Undervoltage coil off"
command]

B_INFMV

741

BI:
CU_GM
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 11
(CU S_src DI/DO 11)

X122.11
[=.nHA-A11]

6571.0

BO:
Precharging control
word
(Precharging STW)
[Precharging On
command]

B_INFMV

743

BI:
CU_GM
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 13
(CU S_src DI/DO 13)

X132.8
[=.nHA-A11]

6660.3

CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig)

B_INFMV

Terminal
[item code]

["Higher-level switch
off" command]
810

VECTOR
MV

4022.11

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 11]

TM15_2

840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)

B_INF
MV

r0863.1

CO/BO: Drive coupling


status/control word
(Coupl ZSW/ STW)
[Control infeed]

VECTOR
MV

845
BI:
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2
CDS
(2. OFF2)

B_INF
MV

899.4

CO/BO: Status word


sequencer infeed
(ZSW Seq INF)
[No active coast down]

VECTOR
MV

845
BI:
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2
CDS
(2. OFF2)

VECTOR
MV

722.6

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 6]

CU_GM

864[0]

VECTOR
MV

863.0

CO/BO: Drive coupling


status/control word
(Coupl ZSW/ STW)
[Infeed operation]

B_INFMV

322

BI:
Command data set
selection CDS bit 0
(select CDS bit 0)

BI:
Infeed operation
(INF operation)

X521.5
[=.nHC-A31]

X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

876[0]

BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)

877[0]

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

B_INFM
V

899.13

CO/BO: Status word


VECTOR
sequencer
MV
(ZSW sequencer) [Test
mode active]

External switching
on inhibited
inversion
(Ext inhibit Inv)

B_INFM
V

=1*

876[0]

BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)

VECTOR
MV

899.13

877[0]

External switching
on inhibited
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv

VECTOR
MV

=1*

876[1]

BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)

VECTOR
MV

899.6

877[1]

External switching
on inhibited
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv

VECTOR
MV

=1*

1208
[0]

BI: Automatic restart


control word
(AR STW)

VECTOR
MV

6530.0

4028

TM15DI/DO Set
input or output
(TM15D DI or DO)

TM15_1

=0x11F0
3*

[DI/DO 0]
Set as output

X520.2
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 1]
Set as output

X520.3
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 2]
Set as input

X520.4
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 3]
Set as input

X520.5
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 4]
Set as input

X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]

CO/BO: Status word


sequencer infeed
(ZSW Seq INF)
[Test mode active]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

B_INFMV

B_INFMV
CO/BO: Status word
sequencer infeed
(ZSW Seq INF)
[Switching on inhibited]

CO/BO:
Line status
(Line status)
[line voltage present]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

B_INFMV

323

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]

324

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

[DI/DO 5]
Set as input

X520.7
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 6]
Set as input

X520.8
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 7]
Set as input

X520.9
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 8]
Set as output

X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 9]
Set as output

X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 10]
Set as output

X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 11]
Set as output

X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 12]
Set as output

X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 13]
Set as input

X521.7
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 14]
Set as input

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 15]
Set as input

X521.9
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 16]
Set as output

X522.2
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 17]
Set as input

X522.3
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 18]
Set as input

X522.4
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 19]
Set as input

X522.5
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 20]
Set as input

X522.6
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 21]
Set as input

X522.7
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 22]
Set as input

X522.8
[=.nHC-A11]

[DI/DO 23]
Set as input

X522.9
[=n.HC-A11]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

4030

BI:
TM31 Signal source
for terminal DO 0
(TM31 S_src DO 0)
Explanation:
Enable command
from the sequencer
to enable the door
magnets

TM31_1

4031

4071
[0]

4100

Terminal
[item code]

BI: Low

COM 0
(X542.2) +
NC 0
(X542.1)
[=.nHC-A51]

BI: High

COM 0
(X542.2) +
NO 0
(X542.3)
[=.nHC-A51]

BI:
TM31 signal source
for terminal DO 1
(TM31 S_src DO)1

TM31_1

BI: Low

COM 1
(X542.5) +
NC 1
(X542.4)
[=.nHC-A51]

BI: High

COM 1
(X542.5) with
NO 1
(X542.6)
[=.nHC-A51]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

4023.18

CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital inputs inverted
status
(TM15D DI Stat inv)
[DI/DO 18]
Explanation:
Ground fault
monitoring fault checkback signal

TM15_1

X522.4
[=.nHC-A11]

1214.2

CO/BO: Automatic
restart status
(AR status)
[Automatic restart
active]

VECTOR
MV

CO: Actual speed


value
(N_Act)

VECTOR
MV

CI:
TM31 analog
outputs signal
source
(TM31 AO
Sig_source)

TM31_1

[0] = AO 0
(X522.1,
X522.2,
X522.3)
[=.nHC-A51]

63[1]

TM31 Temperature
evaluation, sensor
type
(TM31 Temp
Sens_typ)

TM31

X522.7(+)
X522.8(-)
[=.nHC-A51]

=2*

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

325

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

6531

BI:
Precharging twopoint control
activation
(Prech_Twopoint
Act)

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

B_INF
MV

1214.9

CO/BO: Automatic
restart status
(AR status)

VECTOR
MV

6500
[44]

BI:
B_INF
External digital
MV
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Mess S_src)
Explanation:
Error, overvoltage
protection 1 AC
230 V

4023.7

CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status inverted
(TM31 DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 7]

TM31_1

X530.4
[=.nHC-A51]

6576
[0]

BI: Motor cabinet


status
word/Mot_cabinet
ZSW

VECTOR
MV

722.6

CO/BO: CU digital
inputs Status/CU DI
Status
[DI 6]

CU_GM

X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]

6576
[1]

BI: Motor cabinet


status word
(Mot_cabinet ZSW)

VECTOR
MV

722.7

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 7]

CU_GM

X132.4
[=.nHA-A11]

6670
[0]

BI: Switch simulation B_INF


mode
MV
(Swch Sim_mode)

=0*

Simulation mode for


the switch is disabled

6577
[0]

Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, "Safe On"
status word checkback signal
(Manual + Motor)

B_INF
MV

4022.19

CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 19]

TM15_1

X522.5
[=.nHC-A11]

6577
[1]

Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, "Safe Off"
status word checkback signal
(Manual + Motor)

B_INFM
V

4022.20

CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 20]

TM15_1

X522.6
[=.nHC-A11]

6577
[2]

Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF


cabinet, Ground fault MV
monitoring fault
status word checkback signal

4022.18

CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 18]

TM15_1

X522.4

6577
[3]

Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF


cabinet, Ground fault MV
monitoring alarm
status word checkback signal

4022.17

CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 18]

TM15_1

326

Terminal
[item code]

Terminal
[item code]

[=.nHC-A11]

X522.3
[=.nHC-A11]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

6577
[4]

Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, Voltage
monitoring infeed 1
AC status word
check-back signal

6577
[5]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

B_INF
MV

4022.0

CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI/DO 0]

TM31_1

X520.1
[=.nHC-A51]

Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, Voltage
monitoring 24 VDC
status word checkback signal

B_INF
MV

4022.1

CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI/DO 1]

TM31_1

X520.2
[=.nHC-A51]

6684
[0]

BI:
Switch check-back
signal ready
(Swch CB ready)

B_INF
MV

722.0

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 0]

CU_GM

X122.1
[=.nHA-A11]

6685
[0]

BI:
Switch check-back
signal On
(Swch CB on)

B_INF
MV

722.2

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 2]

CU_GM

X122.3
[=.nHA-A11]

6686
[0]

BI:
Switch check-back
signal off
(Swch CB off)

B_INF
MV

722.1

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 1]

CU_GM

X122.2
[=.nHA-A11]

6687
[0]

BI:
Switch check-back
signal auxiliary
voltage 1 OK
(Swch CB U_Aux1)

B_INF
MV

722.4

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 4]

CU_GM

X132.1
[=.nHA-A11]

6688

BI:
Switch check-back
signal auxiliary
voltage 2 OK
(Swch CB U_Aux2)

B_INF
MV

722.5

CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 5]

CU_GM

X132.2
[=.nHA-A11]

BI:

B_INF
MV

722.3

CO/BO:
CU digital inputs,
status

CU_GM

X122.4
[=.nHA-A11]

[0]

6689
[0]

6816

Switch check-back
signal external
switch-off
(Sch RM Ext Swchoff)
CI:
Braking controller
precontrol capability
(P_Precontrol)

Terminal
[item code]

(CU DI status)
[DI 3]
B_INF
MV

82[0]

CO: Active power


actual value

VECTOR
MV

(P_act)
[Unsmoothed]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

327

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

6825
[0]

BI:
Braking controller
braking resistor
temperature
protection
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
alarm]

6825
[1]

BI:
Braking controller
braking resistor
temperature
protection
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
fault]

A.3.4

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

B_INF
MV

4023.7

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 7]

TM15_1

X520.9
[=.nHC-A11]

B_INF
MV

4023.21

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 21]

TM15_1

X522.7
[=.nHC-A11]

Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV

Calling parameter macro PM001540


Parameter macro PM001540 is called by the autostart macro.

328

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

Overview
Table A-5

Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

675
[0,...3]

CI:
Motor supply air
temperature signal
source
(Mot
SupplyAirTemp
S_src)

VECTOR
MV

CDS

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

37.3

CO:
Power unit
temperatures
(PU temperatures)
[Supply air]

VECTOR
MV

Terminal
[item code]

A.3.5
Overview of standard interconnections for the parameter macro PM001540 on
B_INFMV
Calling parameter macro PM001540
Parameter macro PM001540 is called by the autostart macro.

Overview
Table A-6

Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on B_INFMV

Sink
Parameter
[value]

6798
[0]

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

B_INFMV

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

4022.2

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X520.4
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 2]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

329

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

6798
[1]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

B_INFMV

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

4022.3

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X520.5
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_1

X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_1

X520.7
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 3]

6798
[2]

B_INFMV

6798
[3]

B_INFMV

4022.4

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]

4022.5

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 5]

742

BI:

CU_GM

CU, signal source


for terminal DI/DO
12

X132.7
[=.nHA-A11]

6800.0

BI:
CU signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 14
(CU S_src DI/DO
14)

330

CU_GM

X132.10
[=.nHA-A11]

6800.1

B_INFMV

Main fan control word


(Main fan STW)
[Redundant main fan
on]

(CU S_src DI/DO


12)
744

BO:

BO:
Main fan control word
(Main fan STW)
[Redundant main fan
on]

B_INFMV

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.6

Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001555 for option G66

Overview
Table A-7

Interconnections for optional macro PM001555 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

6844
[0]

CI:

PDS

6845
[0]
PDS

6846
[0]
PDS
6847
[0]
PDS

DO

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
4 signal source
(PSA AO 4 S_src)

70[1]

CO:

B_INFMV

CI:

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
5 signal source
(PSA AO 5 S_src)

70[2]

CI:

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
6 signal source
(PSA AO 6 S_src)

76

CI:

78

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
7 signal source
(PSA AO 7 S_src)

Terminal
[item code]

Terminal
[item code]

DC link voltages actual


values
(Vdc_act)
[Positive partial DC link
voltage]
CO:

B_INFMV

DC link voltages actual


values
(Vdc_act)
[Negative partial DC
link voltage]
CO:
Current actual value,
field-generating
(Id_Act)
CO:
Current actual value,
torque-generating
(Iq_Act)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

331

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.7
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001557 Analog O PSA
for options K21 and K20
Overview
Table A-8

Interconnections for optional macro PM001557 on VECTORMV

Sink
Parameter
[value]

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_1

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_2

X520.6

840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)

VECTOR
MV

4022.14

852
BI:
[0 to 3] Enable operation
CDS
(Enable operation)

VECTOR
MV

4022.14

2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)

VECTOR
MV

4022.4

2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)

B_INFMV

4022.4

4038

TM15_1

BI:

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]

332

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:

[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_2

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
X521.2

899.3

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Fault present]

899.7

CO/BO:

[=.nHC-A11]

TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]

TM15_1

X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]

X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]

VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]

4040

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

BI:

TM15_1

X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]

899.2

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]

TM15_1

X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]

899.0

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Ready to switch on]

TM15_1

X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]

807.0

BO:

TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]

4042

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]

6840
[0]
PDS
6841
[0]
PDS
6842
[0]
PDS
6843
[0]
PDS

CI:

Master control active


(PcCtrl active)
[Master control active]

25

CI:

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
1 signal source
(PSA AO 1 S_src)

27

CO:
VECTOR
Current actual value,
MV
absolute value
smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)

CI:

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
2 signal source
(PSA AO 2 S_src)

21

CO:

CI:

32

Output voltage
smoothed
(U_Out smooth)

Actual speed value


smoothed
(N_Act smooth)

Terminal
[item code]

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
0 signal source
(PSA AO 0 S_src)

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
3 signal source
(PSA AO 3 S_src)

CO:

DO

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

CO:
VECTOR
MV
Active power actual
value smoothed
(P_Active_actual_smoo
th)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

333

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.8
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001558 Analog O PSA
for options K22 and K20
Overview
Table A-9

Interconnections for optional macro PM001558 on VECTORMV

Sink
Parameter
[value]

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_1

X521.8

840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)

VECTOR
MV

4022.14

852
BI:
[0 to 3] Enable operation
CDS
(Enable operation)

VECTOR
MV

4022.14

2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)

VECTOR
MV

4022.4

2103
[0,...3]

B_INFMV

4022.4

CDS

4038

4039

BI:
1. Acknowledge
faults
(1. Acknowledge)

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
CO/BO:

[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_2

X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]

TM15_2

X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]

TM15_1
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]

X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]

899.3

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)[Fault
present]

TM15_1

X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]

899.7

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]

334

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]

4040

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

BI:

TM15_1

X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]

899.2

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]

TM15_1

X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]

899.0

CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Ready to switch on]

TM15_1

X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]

807.0

BO:

TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]

4042

BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]

6840
[0]
PDS
6841
[0]
PDS

CI:

Master control active


(PcCtrl active)
[Master control active]

35[0]

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
1 signal source

27

CO:
VECTOR
MV
Current actual value,
absolute value
smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
2 signal source
(PSA AO 2 S_src)

21

CO:

CI:

32

Motor temperature
(Motor temperature)
[Temperature sensor 1]

(PSA AO 1 S_src)
6842
[0]
PDS
6843
[0]
PDS

CI:

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
3 signal source
(PSA AO 3 S_src)

Actual speed value


smoothed
(N_Act smooth)

Terminal
[item code]

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
0 signal source
(PSA AO 0 S_src)
CI:

CO:

DO

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

CO:
VECTOR
MV
Active power actual
value smoothed
(P_Active_actual_smoo
th)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

335

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.9
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001571 for Emergency
Button 1 option
Overview
Table A-10

Interconnections for optional macro PM001571 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

845
[0,...3]

BI:

CDS
849
[0,...3]
CDS

2. OFF2
(2. OFF2)
BI:
2. OFF3
(2. OFF3)

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

VECTOR
MV

Bit 1 = 1:

VECTOR
MV

722.6

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CU_GM

X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]

No OFF2 (enable is
possible)
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 6]

A.3.10
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001580 Lamps and
StartStop Button
Overview
Table A-11

Interconnections for optional macro PM001580 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

840
[0,...3]

BI:

VECTOR
MV

CDS

336

ON/OFF1
(ON/OFF1)

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

4022.14

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

852
[0,...3]

BI:

VECTOR
MV

4022.14

VECTOR
MV

4022.4

B_INFMV

4022.4

CDS

2103
[0,...3]
CDS

2103
[0,...3]
CDS

4038

Enable
operation
(Enable
operation)
BI:
1. Acknowledge
faults
(1.
Acknowledge)
BI:

BI:

BI:

BI:
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15_2

X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]

TM15_2

X520.6

CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]

TM15_1

TM15_1

TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
4040

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]

1. Acknowledge
faults
(1.
Acknowledge)
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]

4039

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

TM15_1

X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]

899.3

X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]

899.7

X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]

899.2

CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)[Fault
present]

CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]

CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

[=.nHC-A31]

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

337

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

4041

BI:

TM15_1

X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]

899.0

CO/BO:

VECTOR
MV

X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]

807.0

TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042

TM15_1

BI:
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]

Status word sequencer


(ZSW sequencer)
[Ready to switch on]

BO:
Master control active
(PcCtrl active)
[Master control active]

Terminal
[item code]

VECTOR
MV

A.3.11
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001582 for option L27L29 Bypass1
Overview
Table A-12

Interconnections for optional macro PM001582 on VECTORMV

Sink
Parameter
[value]

1268

Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

BI:

VECTOR
MV

Bypass checkback signal


synchronization
complete
(Check-back
sync done)

338

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

3819.2

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

CO/BO:

VECTOR
MV

Sync line drive status


word
(Sync ZSW)
[Sync line drive
synchronization
achieved]

Terminal
[item code]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

3802
[0,...3]

BI:

VECTOR
MV

1261.2

VECTOR
MV

1261.9

VECTOR
MV

1261.9

VECTOR
MV

1261.1

VECTOR
MV

1261.1

CDS

Sync line drive


enable
(Sync enable)

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

BI:

6670
[2]

BI:

6671
[1]

BI:

6671
[2]

BI:

6675
[1]

Monitoring time VECTOR


switch-off switch MV
(Swch Off
t_Monitor)
[[1] = switch 1]

=1*

6675
[2]

Monitoring time VECTOR


switch-off switch MV
(Swch Off
t_Monitor)
[[2] = switch 2]

=1*

6676
[1]

Maximum
switch-off time
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[1] = switch 1]

VECTOR
MV

=1*

Switch,
simulation mode
(Swch
Sim_mode)
[[2] = Switch 2]
Switch on/off
(Swch on/off)
[[1] = Switch 1]

Switch on/off
(Swch on/off)
[[2] = Switch 2]

DO

CO/BO:

VECTOR
MV

Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Synchronization
requested]

6670
[1]

Switch,
simulation mode
(Swch
Sim_mode)
[[1] = Switch 1]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Staging requested (by
p2369)]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Staging requested (by
p2369)]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Motor line
switch command]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Terminal
[item code]

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

VECTOR
MV

339

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

6676
[2]

Maximum
switch-off time
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[2] = switch 2]

VECTOR
MV

=1*

6677
[1]

VECTOR
Switch-on
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[1] = switch 1]

=0*

0: Continuous signal

6677
[2]

VECTOR
Switch-on
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[2] = switch 2]

=0*

0: Continuous signal

6678
[1]

Switch-off
VECTOR
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)

=0*

0: Continuous signal

6678
[2]

Switch-off
VECTOR
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)

=1*

1: Pulse signal

340

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

=0*

Parameter is set to a fixed value of 0.

=1*

Parameter is set to one second.

DO

Terminal
[item code]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.12
UPS

Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001583 for option L53

Summary
Table A-13

Interconnections for optional macro PM001583 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value] /
data
block

BICO: Parameter
name (long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]

DO

6500[24]]

BI:
External digital
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Msg S_q)
[A49024]

B_INFMV

BI:
External digital
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Msg S_q)
[A49025]

B_INFMV

6500[25]]

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Parameter name
(long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

4022.2

CO/BO:
TM31 Digital inputs
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI 2]

TM31_1

X520.3

CO/BO:
TM31 Digital inputs
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI 3]

TM31_1

4022.3

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

[=.nHCA11]

X520.4
[=.nHCA11]

341

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.13
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001584 for option L55
Standstill Heating
Overview
Table A-14

Interconnections for optional macro PM001584 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

6500
[26]

BI:

B_INFMV

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

4023.13

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM15_1

X521.7
[=.nHC-A11]

TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 13]

External digital
messages,
signal source
(Ext dig Msg
S_src)
[A49026]

A.3.14
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001585 for options
N20, N21 Capacitor Tripping device Circuit Breaker
Overview
Table A-15

Interconnections for optional macro PM001585 on VECTORMV

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]

DO

6500
[45]

BI:

B_INFMV

342

External digital
messages,
signal source
(Ext dig Msg
S_src)
[A49045]

Terminal [item Paracode]


meter
[value]

4023.8

BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

CO/BO:

TM31_1

X541.2
[=.nHC-A51]]

TM31 Digital input


status inverted
(TM31 DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 8]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals

A.3.15
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001587 for option
Motor temperature sensors
Overview
Table A-16

Interconnections for optional macro PM001587 on VECTORMV

Sink

Source

Parameter
[value] /
data
block

BICO: Parameter
name (long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]

DO

603[0]

CI:
Motor
temperature
signal source

Terminal
[item code]

Parameter
[value]

BICO:
Parameter name
(long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]

VECTOR
MV

4055[0]

CO:
TM31_2
TM31 analog inputs,
actual value in
percent
(TM31 AI value in
%)
[[0] = AI 0]

X521.1
X521.2,
S5.0)
[=.nHDA31]

VECTOR
MV

4055[1]

TM31_2
CO:
TM31 analog inputs,
actual value in
percent
(TM31 AI value in
%)
[[1] = AI 1]

X521.3
X521.4,
S5.1)
[=.nHDA31]

(Mot Temp S_q)


[Temperature
sensor 1]

DO

Terminal
[item code]

[1] = Temperature
sensor 2
603[1]

CI:
Motor
temperature
signal source
(Mot Temp S_q)
[Temperature
sensor 2]

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

343

Start

Start

Glossary
Access level
The drive is protected from unauthorized access using the access levels. The parameters
are divided into different access levels. The access level first needs to be set in order to
display and change a parameter using the BOP.

Adjustable parameters
These parameters are write/read parameters.

Advanced Operator Panel (AOP)


Operator panel for SINAMICS drive units.
The AOP enables user-friendly commissioning, diagnostics, and operator input for the drive.
The AOP30 is connected to the RS232 interface of the Control Unit and has a multi-line LCD
display.

Alarm
An alarm is the response to a potential or expected fault condition detected by the drive that
does not cause the drive to switch off and does not have to be acknowledged. The alarm
mechanism is specified in the PROFIdrive profile. The drive sends a pending alarm to the
control system via a bit in the status word.

Analog input
Terminal to which an external analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal
(e.g. 0 to 20 mA) can be connected. An A/D converter forms an internal software signal from
this signal. The analog inputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.

Analog output
Terminal at which an analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal (e.g. 0 to
20 mA) is output. The signal is formed by converting an internal software signal using an A/D
converter. The analog outputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.

Automatic restart
After a power failure, the automatic restart function automatically restarts a converter when
the supply voltage recovers. It does not require acknowledgement of the power failure fault.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

345

Start

Glossary

BICO technology
The BICO technology method is used for freely interconnecting process data via "standard"
drive parameterization.

BOP
A simple, small operator panel with a numeric display and a few keys that can be plugged in
to the control unit.

CompactFlash card
Memory card for non-volatile storage of the drive software and associated parameters. The
memory card can be plugged into the Control Unit from outside.

Control Unit
Central control module in which the closed-loop and open-loop control functions for one or
more SINAMICS Line Modules and/or Motor Modules are implemented.

Data set
Parameters can be grouped together in a data set. This allows a range of use cases to be
implemented by parameterizing and switching between the data sets. The individual data
sets are entered as "indexed parameters". Switchover is carried out using input signals.

DC link
The component of the converter (or converter system) that connects the input current
converter (rectifier) and the output current converter (one or more inverters).
With voltage source DC link inverters such as SINAMICS devices, a constant DC voltage is
present in the DC link (rectified supply voltage).

DC link voltage
Voltage in a frequency converter's DC link.

Digital input
Input terminal for a +24 V control signal.

Digital output
Output terminal for a +24 V control signal or a relay output.

Direction of rotation
When looking at the front of the outgoing motor shaft, the following applies:

346

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Glossary

Shaft rotates clockwise - positive direction of rotation


Shaft rotates counter-clockwise - negative direction of rotation

Drive object(DO)
A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and, if
necessary, its own faults and alarms. Drive objects can be provided as standard (e.g. onboard I/O), or can be added individually or multiply (e.g. servo control). As a rule, each drive
object has its own STARTER window for parameterization and diagnostic purposes.

Encoder
An encoder is a measuring system that captures actual values for the speed and/or angular
or relative positions and makes them available for electronic processing. Depending on their
mechanical design, encoders can be built into the motor (motor encoder) or mounted on the
external mechanics (external encoder). Depending on the type of motion, a distinction is
made between rotary encoders (sometimes called "shaft encoders") and translatory
encoders (e.g., linear position encoders). In terms of measured value provision, a distinction
is made between "absolute encoders" (code encoders) and -> "incremental encoders". See > "Incremental encoder TTL/HTL" -> "Incremental encoder sin/cos 1Vpp" -> "Resolver".
Incremental position and speed encoder. Unlike the absolute encoder, this encoder does not
output an actual position value signal corresponding to the absolute position, but instead
outputs incremental "delta position or angular signals". There are three types of incremental
encoders: the incremental encoder TTL/HTL, the incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, and the
resolver.
Incremental position and speed encoder (incremental encoder), which usually produces two
pulse trains (tracks) offset at 90 degrees with square-wave output signals and generally also
one zero pulse per revolution. The output signals have TTL levels (in most cases +5 V
RS422 differential signals; TTL = Transistor-Transistor Logic) or HTL levels (+15 or +24 V
logic level; HTL = High Level Transistor Logic).
A high-resolution optical sine/cosine encoder that can be installed in 1FK6 motors as a motor
encoder, for example.
The following signals are normally output:
Two signals offset by 90 degrees, each with 2,048 sinusoidal signal periods per
revolution as differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (A/B sinusoidal encoder
tracks).
A reference signal (zero pulse) per revolution as a differential signal with an amplitude of
0.5 Vpp.
With certain types, two additional sinusoidal signal periods offset by 90 degrees as
differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (C/D track).
To determine the actual position/angular value, the zero crossings of the sinusoidal encoder
tracks are evaluated first (rough evaluation, e.g., in total 4 x 2,048 = 8,192 zero crossings
per revolution). In addition, a fine evaluation can be performed with analog amplitude
detection. Through a combination of rough and fine evaluations, resolutions of more than
1,000,000 increments per encoder revolution can be achieved. Typical sin/cos encoders
include, for example: ERN1387 and ERN1381.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

347

Start

Glossary

Resolver
Extremely mechanically and electrically robust and cost-efficient motor encoder that does not
require any integrated electronics and operates purely according to the electromagnetic
principle: One sine and one cosine signal are induced in each of the two coils offset by 90
degrees. The resolver supplies all of the signals required for speed-controlled operation of
the converter or for position control. The number of sine and cosine periods supplied per
revolution is equal to the number of pole pairs of the resolver. On a two-pole resolver, the
evaluation electronics can output an additional zero pulse for each encoder revolution, which
enables unique assignment of the position information with respect to an encoder revolution.
A two-pole resolver can be used as a single-turn encoder. Two-pole resolvers are suitable
for motors with any number of poles. With multi-pole resolvers, the pole pair numbers of the
motor and the resolver are always identical, which means that multi-pole resolvers ensure a
higher resolution than two-pole resolvers.

Fault
An unintended status that is identified and displayed by the drive controller or can be sent to
a higher-level controller. A fault normally causes the drive to shut down. In certain cases an
alternative reaction can be configured using the appropriate parameter. Faults must always
be acknowledged and the correct procedure for clearing them is specified by PROFIdrive.

Firmware
Firmware is the software saved on a CompactFlash card that is required for operating a
SINAMICS drive.

Firmware version
The version of the software for the control unit saved on the CompactFlash card. The
firmware versions of the individual components are displayed using different parameters.

Flying restart
Following power-up, the flying restart function automatically switches a converter into any
motor connected downstream. When switching into a running motor the motor first needs to
be remagnetized by an induction motor. With drives not equipped with an encoder, a search
for the current speed is also carried out. The current speed setpoint in the ramp-function
generator is then set to the current actual speed value. The ramp-up to the final speed
setpoint starts with this value. The flying restart function can help to shorten the ramp-up
procedure following power-up (if the load is still running down). Application example: After a
power failure, a fan drive can be quickly reconnected to the running fan impeller by means of
the flying restart function.

LOCAL mode
In LOCAL mode the user control unit (for example an AOP30) has master control over the
drive.

348

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Glossary

Master control
Master control is usually assigned to a higher-level controller (e.g. PROFIBUS master). To
operate a drive using the STARTER commissioning tool, master control will occasionally
have to be assigned to the PC, after which master control is returned to the higher-level
controller.

Motor
For the electric motors that can be driven, a basic distinction is made between rotary and
linear motors with regard to their direction of motion, and between synchronous and
asynchronous motors with regard to their electromagnetic operating principle. The motors
are connected to motor modules.

Motor Module
A motor module is a power unit (DC-AC inverter) that provides the power supply for the
motor(s) connected to it. Power is supplied via the DC link on the drive unit. A motor module
must be connected to a control unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and closed-loop control
functions for the motor module are stored in the control unit.

Output frequency
Frequency of the sinusoidal output voltage from a converter.

Parameter
Variable used on the drive system that the user can read and, in some cases, write. A
parameter meets the drive specifications contained in the PROFIdrive profile.

Pre-charging
Charging the DC link capacitors using resistors. Pre-charging is normally performed from the
feeding supply network, but can also be performed from a pre-charged DC link (DC
coupling).

PROFIBUS
Field bus standardized in accordance with IEC 61158, Sections 2 to 6.
PROFIBUS stands for Process Field Bus. PROFIBUS is a multi-vendor standard for the
networking of field devices (e.g., PLC, drives, actuators, or sensors).

PROFIdrive
PROFIBUS profile specified for speed and position-controlled drives by the PROFIBUS User
Organization (German: PNO). The latest version is the PROFIdrive V3 profile.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

349

Start

Glossary

Project wizard
The project wizard provides assistance when creating a project by guiding users through the
configuration settings step-by-step.

REMOTE mode
In REMOTE mode a higher-level controller (for example a customer terminal strip or a
PROFIBUS master) has master control over the drive.

Sensor Module (SMC)


Hardware module for evaluating speed/position encoder signals and providing detected
actual values as numerical values at a DRIVE-CLiQ socket.

Servo control
This type of closed-loop control enables operation with a high dynamic response and
precision for a motor with a motor encoder. In addition to speed control, position control can
be implemented.

Setpoint channel
The setpoint for closed-loop control (e.g. closed-loop speed control) is conditioned in the
setpoint channel. The setpoints can be set either using
PROFIBUS
fixed setpoints or
a motorized potentiometer
The setpoint can be varied by a ramp-function generator, a filter or additional
feedforwarding, for example.

Short-circuiting device
A device which protects the system from dangerous voltages by providing a high contact
closing speed.

Skip frequency band


A skip freuquency band is an illegal range of the speed or frequency setpoint. The upper and
lower limits of the skip frequency band can be paramaterized. If a signal value that lies within
the skip frequency band is specified by an external or internal setpoint source, it is replaced
by one of the skip frequency band limits. In this way, unwanted mechanical resonant
oscillations can be prevented by suppressing speeds that could cause them.

STARTER
STARTER is used to commission and parameterize drive units. This tool can also be used to
execute the diagnostic functions required when servicing the system (e.g. PROFIBUS
diagnostics, function generator, trace).

350

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

Start

Glossary

Terminal Module
Terminal expansion module that snaps onto the installation rail, for installation in the control
cabinet.

Topology
The topology describes the structure of a drive system consisting of a control unit, motor
modules, motors, encoders and terminal modules, including the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring and
other wiring.

Trace
Cyclic saving of internal process signals of the drive for diagnostic purposes or capturing
process data.

Vector control
Vector control (field-oriented control) is a high-performance control method for induction
machines. It is based on an exact model calculation of the motor and two current
components that simulate and accurately control the flux and torque by means of software
algorithms, thereby enabling predefined speeds and torques to be observed and limited
accurately and with a good dynamic response.
Two types of vector control exist:
frequency control (encoderless vector control), and
speed-torque control with speed feedback (encoder).

Visualization parameters
These read-only parameters are used to display important internal software signals.

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

351

Start

Start

Index
A

Access levels, 187

Main/supplementary setpoint, 223


Motorized potentiometer, 221

C
Changing over units, 197
Current setpoint filter
Vector, 244

D
Data sets
Command data set (CDS), 192
Drive data set (DDS), 193
Motor data set (MDS), 194

E
ESD guidelines, 11
ESD protective measures, 12

F
Five safety rules, 11
Fixed setpoints, 220
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Functions
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Jog, 216
Motorized potentiometer, 221

J
Jog, 216
JOG
Jog, 216

K
Kinetic buffering, 246

P
Parameter
Categories, 185
Types, 185
Pre-control
speed, 235
PROFIBUS, 20
PROFIBUS connection, 20

R
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
Reference model, 235

S
Setpoint channel
Direction of rotation limiting, 224
Direction reversal, 224
extended, 214
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Jog, 216
Main/supplementary setpoint, 223
Motorized potentiometer, 221
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
Setpoint limitation, 225
Setpoint modification, 223
Suppression bandwidths, 225
Setpoint modification, 223
Setpoint sources, 215
Speed controller, 231
Reference model, 235
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Speed controller pre-control, 235
STARTER
Starting the drive project, 38, 117

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

353

Start

Switchover

Start

Index

Fixed speed setpoints, 220

T
Torque control, 240

V
Vdc control
Vector n/m control, 246
Vdc_max control
Vector n/m control, 248
Vdc_min control
Vector n/m control, 247
Vector
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Torque control, 240

Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K

355

Start